0% found this document useful (0 votes)

25 views

Isdb T Soft Opm e 6 0

Uploaded by

João Mendes

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

25 views

Isdb T Soft Opm e 6 0

Uploaded by

João Mendes

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 316

MX890120B

ISDB-T Signal Analysis

Software
Operation Manual

Sixth Edition

• For safety and warning information, please read this

manual before attempting to use the equipment.
• Additional safety and warning information is provided
within the MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual Vol. 1 (Basic Operating
Instructions). Please also refer to this document
before using the equipment.
• Keep this manual with the equipment.

ANRITSU CORPORATION

Document No.: M-W2312AE-6.0

Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Corporation uses the
following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu
equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this
manual.

Symbols used in manual

This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or
DANGER death if not performed properly.

WARNING This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if
not performed properly.

CAUTION This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe
injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manual

The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information
about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols
and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated

symbolically in or near the barred circle.

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

indicated symbolically in or near the circle.

This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or

near the triangle.

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

MX890120B
ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software
Operation Manual

8 February 2004 (First Edition)

1 April 2009 (Sixth Edition)

Copyright © 2004-2009, ANRITSU CORPORATION.

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of the
publisher.
The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
Printed in Japan

ii
Equipment Certificate
Anritsu guarantees that this equipment was inspected at shipment and
meets the published specifications.

Anritsu Warranty
• During the warranty period, Anritsu will repair or exchange this
software free-of-charge if it proves defective when used as described in
the operation manual.
• The warranty period is one year from the purchase date.
• The warranty period after repair or exchange will remain 1 year from
the original purchase date, or 30 days from the date of repair or
exchange, depending on whichever is longer.
• This warranty does not cover damage to this software caused by Acts
of God, natural disasters, and misuse or mishandling by the customer.

In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment

purchaser. It is not transferable if the equipment is resold.

Anritsu Corporation will not accept liability for equipment faults due to
unforeseen and unusual circumstances, nor for faults due to mishandling
by the customer.

Anritsu Corporation Contact

In the event that this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu
Service and Sales office. Contact information can be found on the last
page of the printed version of this manual, and is available in a separate
file on the CD version.

iii
Notes On Export Management
This product and its manuals may require an Export License/Approval by
the Government of the product's country of origin for re-export from your
country.
Before re-exporting the product or manuals, please contact us to confirm
whether they are export-controlled items or not.
When you dispose of export-controlled items, the products/manuals need
to be broken/shredded so as not to be unlawfully used for military purpose.

iv
Software License Agreement
Please read this Software License Agreement before using the
accompanying software program (hereafter this software).
You are authorized to use this software only if you agree to all the terms
of this license.
By opening the sealed package containing this software, you are agreeing
to be bound by the terms of this license.
If you do not agree to these terms, return the unopened software package
to Anritsu Corporation (hereafter Anritsu).

1. License
(1) This license gives you the right to use this software on one
MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer (hereafter computer
system).
(2) To use this software on one computer system, this license allows
you to make one copy of this software on the storage device of your
computer system.
(3) You must obtain a site license to use this software on more than
one computer system even if such computer systems are not
operating simultaneously.

2. Copyright
(1) Although you are licensed to use this software, Anritsu retains the
copyright.
(2) Although you have purchased this software, rights other than those
specified in this license are not transferred to you.
(3) You may not print, copy, modify, create derivative works,
incorporate in other software programs, decompile or disassemble
this software in whole or in part, without obtaining prior written
permission from Anritsu.

3. Copying
Notwithstanding item (3) of section 2 above, you may make one copy of
this software for backup purposes only. In this case, you may only
use either the original or the backup copy of this software.

4. Termination
(1) Anritsu will deem this license to be automatically terminated if you
fail to comply with any provision of this license. Upon termination,
you will lose all rights to this software.
(2) Either party (Anritsu or Licensee) to this Software License
Agreement may terminate this agreement by giving written notice,
at least one month in advance, to the other party.
(3) Upon termination of this license for any reason, you must either
immediately destroy this software and related documentation, or
return it to Anritsu.

v
CE Conformity Marking
Anritsu affixes the CE Conformity marking on the following product(s) in
accordance with the Council Directive 93/68/EEC to indicate that they
conform to the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union (EU).

CE marking

1. Product Model
Software: MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software

2. Applied Directive and Standards

When the MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software is installed
in the MS8901A, the applied directive and standards of this software
conform to those of the MS8901A main frame.

PS: About main frame

Please contact Anritsu for the latest information on the main frame
types that MX890120B can be used with.

vi
C-tick Conformity Marking
Anritsu affixes the C-tick marking on the following product(s) in
accordance with the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC
framework of Australia/New Zealand.

C-tick marking

1. Product Model
Software: MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software

2. Applied Directive and Standards

When the MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software is installed
in the MS8901A, the applied directive and standards of this software
conform to those of the MS8901A main frame.

PS: About main frame

Please contact Anritsu for the latest information on the main frame
types that MX890120B can be used with.

vii
Cautions against computer virus infection
• Copying files and data
Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated
using Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument.
All other required files should be transferred by means of USB or
CompactFlash media after undergoing a thorough virus check.
• Adding software
Do not download or install software that has not been specifically
recommended or licensed by Anritsu.
• Network connections
Ensure that the network has sufficient anti-virus security protection in
place.

viii
Configuration of this Manual
This operation manual consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1 Overview
This chapter describes a product overview and describes the prod-
uct configuration and specifications of the MX890120B.

Chapter 2 Operation
This chapter describes the measuring instrument connection
method, parameter settings and how to analyze the measured re-
sults.

Chapter 3 Remote Control

This chapter describes commands and simple program examples
for remote control using GPIB.

Chapter 4 Performance Test

This chapter describes the measuring instruments required for
executing a performance test, how to execute a performance test
and pass-fail judgement criteria for test results.

I
When Upgrading from MX890120A/
120A1/120A2/120B (Version 4.5 or be-
fore) to MX890120B
Note the following precautions when installing the MX890120B ISDB-T
Signal Analysis Software.

(1) Overwrite the existing MX890120A/MX890120A1/MX890120A2/

MS890120B (Version 4.5 or before) when installing the MX890120B.
Otherwise, the MX890120B may not be recognized properly by the
PC application Anritsu provides, when two or more
MX890120x-series software has already been installed into the
MS8901A. In this case, the operation of this software and PC appli-
cation, after installing the MX890120B, is not guaranteed.
(2) Refer to Section 2.15, “Installing Measurement Software” when in-
stalling the MX890120B from the attached memory card.

II
Table 1 below shows the release notes for each measurement system
software. Note that this table only lists the functions added to the
MX890120B since the MX890120B supports all the functions of the
MX890120A/120A1/120A2.

Table 1 Release Notes for Each System Software

MX890120B
MX89 MX89 MX890
Additional Functions 01 01 1 Ver.4.2 Ver.4.3 Ver.4
20A 20A1 20A2 or be- Ver.4.4 .6 or
fore Ver4.5 after
MER Equalizer switching
− − − 9 9 9
meas- function
urement Partial reception
signal analysis
function − − − 9 9 9
(one segment signal
analysis)
Signal parameter
automatic detection − − 9 9 9 9
function
Automatic level ad-
justment function − − − − 9 9
based on MER
Sub-carrier MER
measurement func- − − − − 9 9
tion
CN C/N integration
meas- function − − − 9 9 9
urement
RF/IF switch function − 9 9 9 9 9
Low IF/IQ unbalanced input
(available when MS8901A-18 is − − − 9 9 9
installed)
Revision of spectrum mask laws
− − − − 9 9
and ordinances
Upgrading the modulation fre-
quency measurement accuracy
− − − − 9 9
(available when MS8901A-53 or
73 is installed)
30 dB Mask function is added to
− − − − − 9
Station Power.
UHF (Brazil) is
added to Channel − − − − − 9
Map.
BRAZIL
Brazil is added to
Type − − − − − 9
Spectrum Mask.
Filter characteris-
− − − − − 9
tics file is added.

III
9: Available, −: Not Available

IV
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview.................................... 1-1

1.1 Product Overview ...................................................... 1-2
1.2 Product Configuration ................................................ 1-3
1.3 Application Parts........................................................ 1-5
1.4 Specifications............................................................. 1-6

Chapter 2 Operations................................. 2-1

2.1 Preparing for Measurement ....................................... 2-2
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters ............................. 2-13
2.3 Modulation Analysis................................................... 2-39
2.4 C/N Measurement (C/N Screen)................................ 2-65
2.5 Spectrum Mask .......................................................... 2-68
2.6 Frequency Counter Measurement
(Frequency Counter Screen) ..................................... 2-94
2.7 Storage Mode ............................................................ 2-96
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function ............................................... 2-101
2.9 Measurement Stop
when RF/IF Switch Function Enabled ....................... 2-111
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function....... 2-113
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18) . 2-124
2.12 Saving Measurement Data ........................................ 2-131
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters
(Save/Recall) ............................................................. 2-142
2.14 Screen Color Layout .................................................. 2-151
2.15 Installing Measurement Software .............................. 2-163

Chapter 3 Remote Control......................... 3-1

3.1 Connection and Setting ............................................. 3-2
3.2 Device Messages ...................................................... 3-10
3.3 GPIB Sample Program .............................................. 3-39
3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program ................................... 3-65
3.5 RS-232C Sample Program ........................................ 3-71

V
Chapter 4 Performance Test ..................... 4-1
4.1 When Performance Test Is Required ........................ 4-2
4.2 List of Equipment for Performance Test .................... 4-3
4.3 Performance Test ...................................................... 4-4

Appendix A Performance Test Results

Sheet........................................ A-1

Index .......................................................... Index-1

VI.
Chapter 1 Overview
This chapter describes a product overview and describes the standard
accessory configuration, application parts and specifications of the
MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software.

1.1 Product Overview ...................................................... 1-2

1.2 Product Configuration ................................................ 1-3
1.2.1 Additional Option for the Low IF/IQ
Unbalanced Analysis (MS8901A-18) ............ 1-3
1.2.2 Additional Option for Upgrading the
Modulation Frequency Measurement Accuracy
(MS8901A-53, 73) ......................................... 1-3
1.3 Application Parts........................................................ 1-5
1.4 Specifications............................................................. 1-6

1-1
Chapter 1 Overview

1.1 Product Overview

The MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software is designed to be used
in combination with the MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer.

Various types of signal analysis including MER measurement and

constellation display for OFDM signals conforming to a digital terrestrial
television system can be performed by installing the MX890120B in the
MS8901A.

By using the MX890120B in combination with the spectrum analyzer

function equipped in the MS8901A as standard, various measurements
required to manufacture/maintain transmitters and repeaters for digital
terrestrial broadcasting can be performed with a single MS8901A unit.

This operation manual explains only the functions offered by the

MX890120B. Refer to the MS8901A Operation Manual for its functions,
including the spectrum analyzer function.

1-2
1.2 Product Configuration

1.2 Product Configuration

The following table shows the configuration of MX890120B standard
accessories:

Table 1.2-1 Standard accessories

Qty
Item Model name Product name
.
ISDB-T Signal Analysis
Software MX890120B 1
Software
Standard Memory card* 1
accessory W2312AE Operation manual 1
*: ATA memory card, Compact Flash card or other available memory
card of 20 MB or more.

Additional options for the low IF/IQ unbalanced analysis (MS8901A-18)

and for upgrading the modulation frequency measurement accuracy
(MS8901A-53, 73) are prepared to enhance the specific functions of this
software. Refer to the Section of Unit Option of “MS8901A Digital
Broadcast Signal Analyzer Operation Manual Vol.1”, for details on the
MS8901A additional options.

As to whether or not the additional options are installed, note that some
figures on this manual abbreviate its detailed information.

1.2.1 Additional Option for the Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Analysis

(MS8901A-18)
Low IF/IQ unbalanced analysis can be performed by this software by
installing the MS8901A option MS8901A-18. For details of this function,
refer to Section 2.11 “Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18).”

1.2.2 Additional Option for Upgrading the Modulation Frequency

Measurement Accuracy (MS8901A-53, 73)
Measurement accuracy and its resolution of the modulation frequency
measurement are upgraded by installing the MS8901A option
MS8901A-53 or MS8901A-73. For details of this function, refer to the
table 1.4.1 and 1.4.2 at the Section 1.4 “Specifications”.

With the measured result of the modulation frequency measurement

(Modulation Analysis Screen), the user can know whether or not the
measurement accuracy option of the modulation frequency is installed.

1-3
Chapter 1 Overview

Display digits: to one place after decimal point

Figure 1.2.2-1 When the Option for Modulation Frequency

Measurement Accuracy is not Installed

Display digits: to two place after decimal point

Figure 1.2.2-2 When the Option for the Modulation Frequeny

Measurement Accuracy is Installed

1-4
1.3 Application Parts

1.3 Application Parts

The following application parts are available, sold separately.

Table 1.3-1 Application parts

Model
Product name Remarks
name
MX890110 ISDB-T Field Measure-
A ment Software
J0576D Coaxial cord N, 2 m
J0127C Coaxial cord BNC, 0.5 m
J0127A Coaxial cord BNC, 1 m
J0007 GPIB connection cable 1m
J0008 GPIB connection cable 2m
MP59B 50-Ω coaxial switch DC to 3 GHz, manual switch
MN1607A 50-Ω coaxial switch DC to 3 GHz, can be controlled ex-
ternally
MP640A Divider DC to 1700 MHz
MP520A CM directional coupler 25 to 500 MHz, 75 Ω
MP520B CM directional coupler 25 to 1000 MHz, 75 Ω
MP520C CM directional coupler 25 to 500 MHz, 50 Ω
MP520D CM directional coupler 25 to 1000 MHz, 50 Ω
MP721A Fixed attenuator 3 dB
MP721B Fixed attenuator 6 dB
MP721C Fixed attenuator 10 dB
MP721D Fixed attenuator 20 dB
MP721E Fixed attenuator 30 dB
When ordering parts, specify the model name, product name and quantity.

1-5
Chapter 1 Overview

1.4 Specifications
The specifications of the MX890120B are shown in the table below. These
specifications are based on when the MX890120B is installed in the
MS8901A. For performance specifications, each value is assumed to be
obtained by implementing calibration after 30-minute preheating under
constant ambient temperature conditions.

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Electrical performance (RF input))

When Interim-1 or Interim-2 is selected for Channel Map:
13 to 32 channels
Nchannel center frequency of Interim-1
473 + (N − 13) × 6 + 0.142857 [MHz]
Nchannel center frequency of Interim-2
473 + (N − 13) × 6 + 0.15 [MHz]
When UHF is selected for Channel Map:
13 to 62 channels
Nchannel center frequency of UHF
473 + (N − 13) × 6 + 0.142857 [MHz] (UHF)
When General is selected for Channel Map:
32 to 3000 MHz, 1-Hz steps
When IF Band is selected for Channel Map:
Setting range 3.9 to 38 MHz, 1-Hz steps
When VHF is selected for Channel Map:
Frequency 1 to 12 channel
Nchannel center frequency of VHF
1 ≤N ≤3 : 93 + (N − 1) × 6 + 0.142857 [MHz]
4 ≤N ≤7 : 173 + (N − 4) × 6 + 0.142857 [MHz]
8 ≤N ≤12 : 195 + (N − 8) × 6 + 0.142857 [MHz]
When CATV is selected for Channel Map
Channel: 13 to 63
When UHF (Brazil) is selected for Channel Map:
14 to 69 channel
Nchannel center frequency for UHF (Brazil)
473＋（N − 14）×6＋0.142857 ［MHz］
Offset fre- 0 to 12 GHz
quency
Spectrum When General or IF Band is selected for Channel Map:
reverse Can be selected from Normal or Reverse.

1-6
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Electrical performance (RF input)) (Cont'd)

Reference Setting: Inputs the reference level.
Adjust Range: The MS8901A measures input power for all
bandwidths to determine the reference level.
Setting mode
Refer to MER: The MS8901A measures MER at the Adjust
Range execution and sets reference level so
Level
that the measured result becomes optimal.
Pre-amplifier: Off
Reference +10 to −26 dBm
setting range Pre-amplifier: On
−10 to −46 dBm
Mode Mode1, Mode2, Mode3
Guard inter- 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
val
64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, DQPSK,
Modulation
64QAM (PR), 16QAM (PR), QPSK (PR), DQPSK (PR)
system
PR: Partial reception
Signal
information TV: Fixed input mode. Performs measurement with
user setting values (frequency, channel, level,
spectrum reverse.)
System TV-Auto Select: RF/IF input auto switching mode. Performs
measurement for user setting value and IF
(37.15 MHz, spectrum reverse) input signal;
whichever has the higher level.
When an OFDM modulation signal conforming to ISDB-T is input for a waveform
Switches operation mode corresponding to the signal frequency
Equalizer response.
switch func-
Standard: MX890120A/A1/A2 compatible mode
tion
Advanced: Field use mode
Switches the number of segments to be analyzed.
13 Seg: Receives and analyzes all segments.
Reception 1 Seg: Receives and analyzes one segment.
Modulation segment Note that the following parameters are not measured (can be se-
analysis switch func- lected) when 1 Seg is set:
tion • Mode 1 GI: All
• Mode 2 GI: 1/16 and 1/32
• Mode 3 GI: 1/32
Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz
range
Frequency ±99 kHz
lock range
+10 to −26 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off)
Level range
−10 to −46 dBm (pre-amplifier: On)

1-7
Chapter 1 Overview

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Electrical performance (RF input)) (Cont'd)

• When mode: Mode3, guard interval: 1/8, segmentation offset:
512, modulation system for all segments of Layers_A to _C:
64QAM, average count: 5, 13 segments;
±0.3 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement frequency)

• When mode: Mode1, guard interval: 1/4, segmentation offset:

128, modulation system for all segments of Layers_A to _C:
Frequency DQPSK, average count: 5, 13 segments; ±1.6 Hz + (reference fre-
measurement quency accuracy × measurement frequency)
accuracy
• When option: The MS8901A-53 or the MS8901A-73 is installed,
mode: Mode3, guard interval: 1/8, segmentation offset: 512, modu-
lation system for all segments of Layer_A to _C: 64 QAM, average
count: 5, ±0.15 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement
frequency)
When average count: 40 in the above condition
±0.1 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement frequency)
Conventional (overall)
Modulation Layer_A
analysis MER Layer_B
(Cont’d) measurement Layer_C
item TMCC
AC1
AC2
Conventional value when mode: Mode3, guard interval: 1/8, seg-
mentation offset: 512, modulation system for all segments of
Residual Layer_A to C: 64QAM, level: −20 dBm, Pre-amplifier: off, average
MER count: 10, 13 segments;
≥44 dB (37.15 MHz, typical value)
≥42 dB (500 MHz, typical value)
Layer_A (64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, DQPSK)
Layer_B (64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, DQPSK)
Layer_C (64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, DQPSK)
TMCC (DBPSK)
Constellation AC1 (DBPSK)
AC2 (DBPSK)
Marker function: I and Q values at the marker can be read.
Note that when Advanced is selected for the Equalizer switch
function, invalid values are included at the measurement point.

1-8
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

Displays assuming the average level of 5.57MHz bandwidth is 0
dB.
Level axis: ±2 dB, ±5 dB, ±10 dB, ±20 dB, ±50 dB
Marker function: Relative level and frequency at the marker can
be read.
Correction: Frequency characteristic calibration can be per-
Frequency formed using external signal source.
response Display range: Depends on the reception segment switch func-
tion settings:
13 Seg: 5.57 MHz band (13 Segments)
1 Seg: 0.43 MHz band (1 Segment)
Note that these specifications apply when Standard is selected for
the Equalizer switch function. When Advanced is selected for the
Equalizer switch function, both ends of the frequency bandwidth
are displayed as invalid values.
Specifies a position where analysis data is obtained within guard
Modulation
interval. The end of the guard interval is 0.
analysis
(Cont’d) Guard
Segmenta- interval 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32
tion offset Mode
Mode1 0 to 512 0 to 256 0 to 128 0 to 64
0 to
Mode2 0 to 512 0 to 256 0 to 128
1024
Analyzes the signal input by user control (panel operation or re-
mote control) to automatically detect the parameters required for
modulation analysis.
Frequency lock range: ±99 kHz (typical value)
Signal pa- Mode, GI, TMCC information auto detection:
rameter auto Analyzes the signal input by user control to automatically de-
detection tect and set the mode, guard interval and TMCC information.
TMCC information auto detection:
Analyzes the signal input by user control to automatically de-
tect and set the TMCC information.

1-9
Chapter 1 Overview

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

Displays MER of all sub-carriers, which exist in the bandwidth.

MER axis: 20 dB, 30 dB, 40 dB, 50dB and 60 dB

Magnify Window: Enables to enlarge the selected segment

Worst Envelope Line: Displays the worst value of the sub-carrier

MER as the line graph. Non-display or display can be selected.

Marker Function: Enables to read MER and frequency with

marker. Can select the current value or the worst value

Peak Display: Enables to read the MER and frequency of the

Modulation worst value. Can set the full screen, enlarged screen and
analysis Sub-carrier
MER non-display.
(Cont’d)
Threshold Setting: Recognizes the sub-carrier worse than the
threshold value set by MER
Setting Range: 0 to 30 dB (based on the Conventional MER
value)

Display Range: there are two settings of the reception segment

switching function
13 Seg: 5.57 MHz bandwidth (13 Segment)
1 Seg: 0.43 MHz bandwidth (1 Segment)
All the above are based on the condition when Standard is se-
lected with Equalizer switching function. When Advanced is se-
lected with the equalizer switching function, both ends of the
frequency bandwidth are displayed as invalid
For CW (continuous wave)
Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz (except IF Band)
range
Offset 100 Hz to 10 MHz
frequency
C/N value −40 to −140 dBc/Hz
When 500 MHz, −10 dBm;
≤−95 dBc/Hz (1-kHz offset)
Residual C/N
≤−108 dBc/Hz (10-kHz offset)
C/N
≤−118 dBc/Hz (100-kHz offset)
When input level: +10 to −20 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off) or −10 to
Frequency
−40 dBm (pre-amplifier: On), for input signal of ±1 kHz from the
measurement set frequency, average count: 5;
accuracy
±0.1 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement frequency)
Display 0.01 Hz
resolution
Marker
Offset frequency and C/N value at the marker can be read.
function

1-10
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

+10 to −20 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off)
Level range
−10 to −40 dBm (pre-amplifier: On)
Calculates C/N integral value for the specified range.
C/N
C/N integral display range: 0 to −99.9 dBc
(Cont’d) C/N integra-
tion function C/N integral setting range: 100 Hz to 10 MHz, 1-Hz steps
The frequencies of the integral start/stop points must be differ-
ent.
Measurement can be set with three methods
Type A: Channel number for measurement is fixed to 1 channel.
Frequency 32 to 2990 MHz (other than IF Band)
Mask type Transmission, User-1, User-2
Transmission: Conforms to the transmission spectrum mask de-
scribed in the “ARIB STD B31” (version 1.5).
0
Relative level (dB)

–20

–27

Mask –50
break point
–10 –4.22 –2.72 0.0 +3.0 +4.5 +10
[1] –2.86 –2.65 +2.93 +3.14

–10 –4.36 –2.86 0.0 +2.86 +4.36 +10

[2] –3.00 –2.79 +2.79 +3.00

Difference from channel center frequency (MHz)

Spectrum
mask Notes: [1] When Channel Map is set to other than General
(except IF Band)
[2] When Channel Map is set to General
User-1, User-2: Any break point can be set up to 50 points
Performs pass-fail judgment. Judged as “Fail” when the spec-
Pass-fail
trum waveform exceeds the mask line. 0-dB line is not included
judgment
in the criteria.
Normal marker: Waveform frequency and relative level at the
Marker marker can be read.
function Delta marker: Frequency difference and relative level differ-
ence between any two points can be read.
Occupied Measures the bandwidth, where 99 % of total power of 20 MHz
frequency span is included. 1 kHz resolution.
bandwidth
measurement
When frequency is from 32 to 1000 MHz:
Level range +10 to −22 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off) (Frequency: 32 to 1000 MHz)
−10 to −42 dBm (pre-amplifier: On) (Frequency: 32 to 1000 MHz)
Spectrum Recalls the spectrum mask line by using a remote control com-
mask line re- mand.
call

1-11
Chapter 1 Overview

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

Type B: Channel number for measurement is three at maximum. Frequency
measurement width (Span) is 30 MHz ( ±15 MHz) at 1 channel measurement,
32 to 2985 MHz (other than IF Band) at 1 channel measurement
Frequency However, when several waves are measured, the frequency range
for measurement should not exceed over 3 GHz.
Mask type Transmission, User-1, User-2
Frequency 1 to 3 channel. However, several waves are limited to the adja-
channel cent continuous wave.
Selection of station power: High/Low/30dB Mask
• High: When the average power of the transmission or relay
station is more than 2.5 W
Station power • Low: When the average power of the transmission or relay
station is less than or equal to 2.5 W
• 30dB Mask: When the average power of the transmission or re-
lay station is less than 0.25 W.
Average 0.25 to 2.5 [W]
power Setting
Only when the station power is selected to Low
Range
0.025 to 0.249 [W]
(Average
Power) Only when the station power is 30 dB Mask.
Transmission: Conforms to the transmission spectrum mask de-
scribed in the Investigation Report from Spurious
Committee
Spectrum
mask
[dB]
(Cont’d)
–27.4

The range to
change the
maximum
–47.4 attenuation

–55.4
–57.4
–67.4

–77.4
Mask
break point ① –15 –4.36 –2.86 0.0 +2.86 +4.36 +15 [MHz]
–3.00 +2.79 +2.79 +3.00
② –18 –7.36 –5.86 0.0 +5.86 +7.36 +18 [MHz]
–6.00 +5.79 +5.79 +6.00
③ –21 –10.36 –8.86 0.0 +8.86 +10.36 +21 [MHz]
–9.00 +8.79 +8.79 +9.00

Notes: [1] When the number of Channel is set to 1: Center

frequency = set frequency
[2] When the number of Channel is set to 2: Center
frequency = Set frequency + 3 [MHz]
[3] When the number of Channel is set to 3: Center
frequency = Set frequency + 6 [MHz]
User-1, User-2: Any arbitrary breakpoint can be set up to 50
points

1-12
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

When station power is high: −77.4 [dB]
When station power is low: 0.25 W < P ≤ 2.5 W: − (73.4 + 10 logP)
[dB] P ≤ 0.25 W: −67.4 [dB]
Spectrum
Maximum The value is gained, depending on the Average Power P[W].
mask
attenuation When station power is 30 dB Mask, depending on the Average
(Cont’d)
Power P [W],
0.025 W ≦ P < 0.25 W: − (73.4 + 10 logP) [dB]
P ≦ 0.025 W: −57.4 [dB]
Frequency Channel Number = 1: 30 ( ±15) [MHz]
measurement Channel Number = 2: 36 ( ±18) [MHz]
width (SPAN) Channel Number = 3: 42 ( ±21) [MHz]
Performs pass-fail judgment. Judged as “Fail” when the spec-
Pass-fail
trum waveform exceeds the mask line. −27.4 dB line is not in-
judgment
cluded in the criteria.
Normal marker: Reads the frequency and relative level of the
Marker wave with marker
function Delta marker: Reads the difference of frequency and that of rela-
tive level between arbitrary 2 points
Occupied Measures the bandwidth occupying 99 % within the whole band-
frequency width power of 30 MHz span.
bandwidth Resolution: 1 kHz
measurement Display: Only at 1 channel measurement
+10 to −22 dBm (Preamplifier: Off) (Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz)
Level range
−10 to −42 dBm (Preamplifier: On) (Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz)

Mask line re- Recalls the spectrum mask line by using a remote control com-
call mand.
Brazil: Channel number for measurement is fixed to 1 channel.

Frequency 32 to 2985 MHz (other than IFBand)

Mask type Transmission, User-1, User-2

Station power Selects the station power: Critical/Sub-Critical/Non-Critical.

1-13
Chapter 1 Overview

Mask Transmission: Conforms to “ABNT NBR 15601: 2007.”

break point [dB]

–27.4

–47.4

–61.4

① –110.4
② –117.4
③ –124.4
–15 –9 –3.15–2.86 0.0 +2.86 +3.15 +9 +15 [MHz]
–4.5 –3.00 -2.79 +2.79 +3.00 +4.5

Notes:[1] When Station Power is Non Critical:

The maximum attenuation = －110.4 [dB].
[2] When Station Power is Sub Critical:
The maximum attenuation = －117.4 [dB].
[3] When Station Power is Critical:
The maximum attenuation = －124.4 [dB].
User-1, User-2: Up to 50 break points can be set.
Marker Normal marker: Reads the frequency and relative level of the
function waveform with marker.
Delta marker: Reads the difference of frequency and relative
level difference between any 2 points.
Marker trace: Reads a mask line.
Pass-fail Performs pass-fail judgment. Judged as “Fail” when the spec-
judgment trum waveform exceeds the mask line. −27.4 dB line is not in-
cluded in the criteria.
+10 to −22 dBm (Preamplifier: Off) (Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz)
Level range
−10 to −42 dBm (Preamplifier: On) (Frequency 32 to 1000 MHz)

Mask line re- Recalls the spectrum mask line by using a remote control com-
call mand.

Filter char- Default, User-1, User-2, User-3

acteristics file
selection
For CW (continuous wave)
Frequency
3.9 to 1000 MHz
range
When input level: +10 to −20 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off) or −10
Frequency Frequency to −40 dBm (pre-amplifier: On), for input signal of ±1 kHz from
counter measurement the set frequency, average count: 5;
accuracy ±0.1 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement fre-
quency)
Display
0.01 Hz
resolution

1-14
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-1 Specifications (Cont’d)

For modulation analysis, C/N and frequency counter
Normal Displays measured results every time.
Displays average for the set number of measured results. How-
ever, overwrites every 5 times for constellation.
Average count: 2 to 100
Average Display method:
Every: Displays every measured result being averaged.
Once: Updates display after averaging the set number of
measured results.
Displays the maximum value among the measured results up to
the latest one.
However, the minimum value is displayed for the MER value.
MaxHold
Frequency is determined by the absolute value of the difference.
Storage mode
Constellation display is overwritten every 5 times. The display of
the sub-carrier MER waveform is same as Normal.
Waveform display is overwritten without clearing the past meas-
OverWrite ured results. Numeric values are displayed each time same as
Normal display.
Displays the moving average for the set number of measured re-
sults. However, overwrites every 5 times for constellation.
Invalid during C/N measurement.
Moving Average count: 2 to 100
Average Display method:
Every: Displays every measured result being averaged.
Once: Updates display after averaging the set number of
measured results.
Measurement User setting value (RF) and preset value (IF)
target
As IF, Channel Map is 37.15 MHz when General is set, spectrum
Preset value
reverse
User RF: Channel Map/frequency/offset frequency/reference setting
setting items IF: Reference setting
RF: RF measurement
RF/IF auto Measurement
IF: IF measurement
switch mode target display
No Measure: Not measured
(No display): Normal
Switch status
Signal Loss: No signal
display
Signal Abnormal: Signal error
Storage (No display): Normal
status Changed: Input is switched when storage mode is set to Av-
display erage or Moving Average.

1-15
Chapter 1 Overview

Table 1.4-2 Specifications (Electrical specifications (IQ input) – When the MS8901A-18 installed)
Low IF, IQ Unbalanced selectable
Input format
When Low IF is selected, only the I connector is valid (unbalanced input)
Measurement Modulation analysis only
item
(Function and performance equivalent to modulation analysis when RF is input)
• Equalizer function
• Reception segment switch function
Function, • Constellation
performance • Frequency characteristics
• Segmentation offset
• Signal parameter automatic detection
• Sub-carrier MER
Frequency set- 250 kHz to 5 MHz, 1 Hz steps
ting range
Impedance 1 MΩ (parallel capacity < 100 pF) or 50 Ω selectable
Input level 0.1 to 1.0 Vpp (unbalanced input, via input pin)
range DC connection or AC connection selectable
When one OFDM modulation signal wave conforming to ISDB-T is input
Frequency ±99 kHz
lock range
(When 1 Seg is selected for reception segment switch function)
• When Terminal: Low IF-DC or IQ-DC selected, Impedance: 50
Ω, Mode: Mode3, Guard interval: 1/8, Segmentation offset: 512,
Modulation mode: 64QAM partial reception signal, Input level:
0.1 Vrms, Average count: 5 times for 1 Seg signal.
Modulation ±0.3 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement fre-
analysis Frequency quency)
measure- • When option: The MS8901A-53 or the MS8901A-73 is installed,
ment accu- Impedance: 50 Ω, Mode: Mode3, Guard interval: 1/8, Segmenta-
racy tion offset: 512, Modulation system: 64 QAM partial reception
signal, Input level: 0.1 Vrms, Average count: 5 times for 1 Seg
signal.
±0.15 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × measurement fre-
quency)
When average count: 40 in the above condition, ±0.1 Hz + (ref-
erence frequency accuracy × measurement frequency)

1-16
1.4 Specifications

Table 1.4-2 Specifications (Electrical specifications (IQ input) – When the MS8901A-18 installed)
(Cont’d)
Conventional (total)
Layer_A
MER Layer_B
measure- Layer_C
ment item TMCC
AC1
Modulation AC2
analysis (Cont’d) (When 1 Seg is selected for reception segment switch function)
Conventional value when Terminal: Low IF-DC or IQ-DC se-
lected, Impedance: 50 Ω, Mode: Mode3, Guard interval: 1/8, Seg-
Residual mentation offset: 512, Modulation mode: 64QAM partial recep-
MER tion signal, Input level: 0.1 Vrms, Average count: 10 times for 1
Seg signal.
≥50 dB (507.9 kHz typical value)
507.9 kHz: Frequency of 1/16 of FFT clock (512/63 MHz)

1-17
Section 1 Overview

1-18.
Chapter 2 Operations
This chapter describes parameter setting and measurement methods.

2.1 Preparing for Measurement ..................................... 2-4

2.1.1 Panel description ....................................... 2-4
2.1.2 Input method .............................................. 2-9
2.1.3 Calibration .................................................. 2-13
2.1.4 Switching systems ..................................... 2-15
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters ........................... 2-16
2.2.1 System ....................................................... 2-16
2.2.2 Terminal ..................................................... 2-17
2.2.3 Frequencies and Channels ........................ 2-17
2.2.4 Offset Frequency ....................................... 2-25
2.2.5 Spectrum.................................................... 2-26
2.2.6 Level........................................................... 2-27
2.2.7 Mode............................................................ 2-36
2.2.8 Guard Interval .............................................. 2-36
2.2.9 TMCC......................................................... 2-37
2.2.10 Preamplifier................................................ 2-38
2.2.11 Measurement mode ................................... 2-39
2.2.12 Initialization (Preset) .................................. 2-40
2.3 Modulation Analysis................................................. 2-43
2.3.1 Frequency and MER measurement
(No Trace screen) ...................................... 2-45
2.3.2 Constellation measurement
(Constellation screen) ................................ 2-49
2.3.3 Frequency Response
(Freq Response screen) ............................ 2-53
2.3.4 Sub-Carrier MER Screen ........................... 2-58
2.3.5 Partial reception signal analysis
(Recv. Seg) ................................................ 2-64
2.3.6 Segmentation Offset .................................. 2-68
2.4 C/N Measurement (C/N Screen).............................. 2-69
2.4.1 C/N measurement...................................... 2-69
2.5 Spectrum Mask ........................................................ 2-72
2.5.1 Spectrum mask measurement................... 2-73
2.5.2 Recalling spectrum mask line .................... 2-90
2.5.3 Marker ........................................................ 2-100
2.5.4 Loading Filter Characteristics File ............. 2-102
2.5.5 Showing/hiding waveform .......................... 2-107
2.5.6 Marker Trace.............................................. 2-109
2.6 Frequency Counter Measurement
(Frequency Counter Screen) ................................... 2-111

2-1
Chapter 2 Operations

2.6.1 Frequency counter measurement.............. 2-111

2.7 Storage Mode .......................................................... 2-113
2.7.1 Normal........................................................ 2-114
2.7.2 Average...................................................... 2-114
2.7.3 Moving Avg ................................................ 2-116
2.7.4 Max Hold .................................................... 2-117
2.7.5 Over Write .................................................. 2-117
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function ............................................. 2-118
2.8.1 Setting Measurement Parameters ............. 2-118
2.8.2 System ....................................................... 2-119
2.8.3 Terminal ..................................................... 2-119
2.8.4 Frequencies and Channels ........................ 2-120
2.8.5 Offset Frequency ....................................... 2-120
2.8.6 Spectrum.................................................... 2-121
2.8.7 Level........................................................... 2-121
2.8.8 Mode .......................................................... 2-123
2.8.9 Guard Interval ............................................ 2-123
2.8.10 TMCC......................................................... 2-123
2.8.11 Preamplifier................................................ 2-124
2.8.12 Measurement mode ................................... 2-125
2.8.13 Initialization (Preset) .................................. 2-125
2.8.14 Measurement screens (Modulation Analysis,
C/N, Spectrum Mask)................................. 2-126
2.8.15 Spectrum Mask measurement................... 2-127
2.8.16 Saving measurement data ......................... 2-127
2.9 Measurement Stop
when RF/IF Switch Function Enabled ..................... 2-128
2.9.1 Measurement stop conditions.................... 2-128
2.9.2 Measurement stop criteria ......................... 2-128
2.9.3 Measurement stop mechanism.................. 2-129
2.9.4 Restarting measurement after stop ........... 2-129
2.9.5 Countermeasures to measurement stop ... 2-129
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function..... 2-130
2.10.1 Automatic detection operation ................... 2-131
2.10.2 Confirming detected parameters ............... 2-136
2.10.3 Specifying segment for automatic detection
(Auto. Det. from Seg) ................................. 2-139
2.10.4 Canceling automatic detection
(Auto. Det. Cancel) .................................... 2-140
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18) ........... 2-141
2.11.1 Setting measurement parameter ............... 2-142
2.11.2 System ....................................................... 2-142
2.11.3 Terminal & impedance ............................... 2-143
2.11.4 Channel/Frequency.................................... 2-143

2-2
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

2.11.5 Offset Frequency ....................................... 2-144

2.11.6 Spectrum.................................................... 2-144
2.11.7 Level........................................................... 2-144
2.11.8 Mode .......................................................... 2-145
2.11.9 Guard Interval ............................................ 2-145
2.11.10 TMCC......................................................... 2-145
2.11.11 Preamplifier................................................ 2-145
2.11.12 Measurement mode ................................... 2-145
2.11.13 Initialization (Preset) .................................. 2-145
2.11.14 Setting list .................................................. 2-146
2.11.15 Modulation Analysis ................................... 2-147
2.11.16 Saving measurement data ......................... 2-147
2.12 Saving Measurement Data ...................................... 2-148
2.12.1 Saving screen ............................................ 2-149
2.12.2 Saving numerical value data...................... 2-152
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters
(Save/Recall) ........................................................... 2-159
2.13.1 Saving measurement parameters
(Save)......................................................... 2-159
2.13.2 Recalling measurement parameters
(Recall)....................................................... 2-165
2.14 Screen Color Layout ................................................ 2-168
2.14.1 Fixed pattern color layout........................... 2-168
2.14.2 User defined color layout ........................... 2-170
2.15 Installing Measurement Software ............................ 2-181

2-3
Chapter 2 Operations

2.1 Preparing for Measurement

2.1.1 Panel description
The front panel key names required for reading this Operations Manual
and the numerical value input method are described before explaining
operations.

Set key
Soft keys Rotary Encoder

Anritsu MS8901A

Cancel key

Step key

More key
Numeric keypad

Figure 2.1.1-1 Front panel

(1) Cursor:
The cursor is expressed as a reverse display on the screen and indi-
cates items that can be input. The cursor is moved with the Step key
or the Rotary Encoder.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >>

System : [TV ]
Terminal : [RF ]

Frequency
Channel Map : [Interim-1(1/7MHz shift)]
Channel / Frequency : [ 13CH]

Figure 2.1.1-2 Cursor

(2) Step key:

The Step key moves the cursor. The cursor moves up by pressing the
up arrow key (↑). The cursor moves down by pressing the down ar-
row key (↓).
In addition, the input numerical values and selected items can be
changed when the Set key is pressed so that the cursor item can be
input.

2-4
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

(3) Rotary Encoder:

The Rotary Encoder moves the cursor. The cursor moves down by
turning the Rotary Encoder to the right. The cursor moves up by
turning the Rotary Encoder to the left.
In addition, the input numerical values and selected items can be
changed when the Set key is pressed so that the cursor item can be
input.

(4) Set key:

Press the Set key to set numerical value inputs of cursor items.
Press the Set key after inputs are finished to set the input.

(5) Cancel key (Cancel):

Values during input are disabled where the Set key is pressed and
items are in an input state.

(6) Numeric keypad:

The numeric keypad is used to input numerical values directly
where the Set key is pressed and items are in an input state. Press a
unit key for these items or the Set key after inputting the numerical
values to set the input.
Shift CE

D E F Hold
dBm
7 8 9 GHz dB
Numerical value A B C
keys 4 5 6 MHz s
V
Unit keys
Color
mV
1 2 3 kHz ms
Cal Enter
uV
0 . +/− Hz us

Figure 2.1.1-3 Numeric keypad

(7) Soft key:

The soft key function changes according to the displayed screen.
Each key function is displayed on the screen at the left side of the
keys.
Operations when the soft key is pressed differ according to type. Key
operations are distinguished according to the symbols on the upper
right of the screen where key functions are displayed.

2-5
Chapter 2 Operations

(a) No mark
The soft key with nothing in the upper right is executed as is
when the key is pressed. For example, when the ±2 dB key (F1)
in the Vertical Scale menu on the Freq Response screen is
pressed, the vertical axis range of the frequency response graph
on screen changes to ±2 dB.

Figure 2.1.1-4 ±2 dB key

(b) Arrow (→)

Press a soft key with an arrow (→) on the upper right to change
the screen display. For example, the screen changes from the
Setup Common Parameter screen to the Modulation Analysis
screen when the Modulation Analysis key (F1) on the Setup
Common Parameter screen is pressed.

Figure 2.1.1-5 Modulation Analysis key

(c) Sharp (#)

A soft key with a sharp (#) on the upper right requires numeri-
cal value inputs or item selection from the list displayed.
Pressing such a key opens a pop-up window to input numerical
values or select items from the list.

2-6
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

When the Trace Format key (F1) on the Signal Analysis screen
is pressed, for example, the pop-up window opens on the right
side of the Trace Format key to select the result display method
(Trace Format).

Figure 2.1.1-6 Trace Format key

When the Segmentation Offset key (F4) on the Signal Analysis

screen is pressed, the pop-up window opens on the right side of
the Segmentation Offset key to input numerical values.

Figure 2.1.1-7 Segmentation Offset key

(d) Asterisk (*)

A soft key with an asterisk (*) on the upper right has a sub-
menu. Press such a key to change the soft key contents.
For example, when the Storage Mode key (F2) on the Signal
Analysis screen is pressed, the soft key contents change to those
for selecting Storage mode types.

Figure 2.1.1-8 Storage Mode key

2-7
Chapter 2 Operations

(8) More key:

The More key switches the soft key page. The pages of the currently
displayed soft key are displayed on the left of the More key, and the
current page is reverse displayed. Press the More key to switch (tog-
gle) the page.

Figure 2.1.1-9 More key

2-8
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

2.1.2 Input method

Follow the procedure shown below to input numerical values or select
items. The Setup Common Parameter screen is used in this example.

Figure 2.1.2-1 Setup Common Parameter screen as example

2-9
Chapter 2 Operations

<Procedure>
1. Move the cursor to the target item using the Step key or the Rotary
Encoder. Items that can be input are indicated by brackets [ ].
Figure 2.1.2-2 (a) shows a numerical value input example, and (b)
shows an item selection example. Move the cursor to Level Reference
for (a), and Signal Mode for (b).

(a) For numerical value input

(b) For item selection

Figure 2.1.2-2 Moving the cursor

2. Press the Set key.

3. A small pop-up window opens on the screen.
Numeric values can be input directly for items such as the frequency
by using the numeric keypad.
Any input values can be changed in the minimum steps determined
for the corresponding item by using the Step key or Rotary Encoder.
Figure 2.1.2-3 (a) shows a numerical value input example where
Level Reference is changed from 0 dBm to 10 dBm.
A candidate item is selected by using the Step key or Rotary Encoder
from a group of items whereby one candidate item is selected from a
number of candidates such as mode settings.
Figure 2.1.2-3 (b) shows an item selection example where Mode is
changed from Mode2 to Mode3.

2-10
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

(a) Numerical value input pop-up window

(b) Item selection pop-up window

Figure 2.1.2-3 Pop-up window

2-11
Chapter 2 Operations

4. Press the Set key again to determine the input values. Figure 2.1.2-4
(a) shows a numerical value input example, and (b) shows an item
selection example.

(a) For numerical value input

(b) For item selection

Figure 2.1.2-4 Determining input

5. Press the Cancel key during input to disable numerical values input
or selected items and end the process.

2-12
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

2.1.3 Calibration
It takes approximately 30 minutes after power is added to the MS8901A
for the internal circuit to stabilize. Internal circuit attenuation and gain
vary when the ambient temperature changes at this time even after
pre-heating is completed. These must be corrected before the measure-
ment starts in order to demonstrate the performance as prescribed in the
specifications. These operations are called Calibration.

Execute calibration in the following cases:

1. Before starting measurement after power supply has been supplied

and pre-heating is finished.
2. When the ambient temperature fluctuates.

Spectrum key Signal Analysis key

Anritsu MS8901A

Shift key

Cal key

Figure 2.1.3-1 Front panel keys used in calibration

<Procedure>
1. Calibration is performed in the Spectrum Analyzer mode of the
MS8901A. Press the Spectrum key on the front panel (see Figure
2.1.3-1).
The screen is then displayed as shown in Figure 2-1.3-2 below.

2-13
Chapter 2 Operations

Figure 2.1.3-2 Spectrum Analysis screen

2. Press the Shift key and then press the Cal key after shifting to the
Spectrum Analyzer mode (the Shift key lamp lights up when the
Shift key is pressed). The soft key menu contents will change to
Calibration item selection. Press the All Cal soft key (F1) to execute
calibration.

Figure 2.1.3-3 Calibration soft keys

Calibration will take approximately 5 minutes. Press the Signal Analysis

key on the front panel after calibration is completed to return to the Sig-
nal Analysis Mode.

2-14
2.1 Preparing for Measurement

2.1.4 Switching systems

The MS8901A provides the spectrum analyzer functions as standard
while also achieving signal analysis functions by installing optional
software including the MX890120B.
Up to three types of application software can be installed. For example,
install the MX890110A ISDB-T Field Measurement Software together
with the MX890120B to perform measurement using one instrument re-
quired with ISDB-T such as modulation analysis, field strength meas-
urement and delay profile measurement.

Press the System key on the front panel with the Signal Analysis screen
displayed (the Signal Analysis key is pressed) to switch (toggle) the ap-
plication software.

System key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 2.1.4-1 System key

The soft key menu contents change. The application software currently
installed is displayed in soft keys. Press the key for the software to be
executed.

Change by pressing
System key

Figure 2.1.4-2 Soft key menu for system selection

2-15
Chapter 2 Operations

2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

This section describes setting the measurement parameters required for
measuring signals with the MS8901A. Measurement parameters are set
in the Setup Common Parameter screen or each measurement screen.
Press the Signal Analysis key on the front panel or press the Back Screen
soft key (F6) at each measurement screen to display the Setup Common
Parameter screen.

Figure 2.2-1 Setup Common Parameter screen

2.2.1 System
This item enables/disables the RF/IF switch function. Refer to Section 2.8
“RF/IF Switch Function” for details of the RF/IF switch function.
The RF/IF switch function is assumed to be disabled (System = TV) in
this section.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >>

System : [TV ]

Figure 2.2.1-1 System item

2-16
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

2.2.2 Terminal
Set the input connector used for measurement. When the MS8901A-18
(Low IF/IQ unbalanced input) option is not installed, only RF input is set.
When the option is installed, analysis using the IQ connector is enabled
and the impedance setting is enabled. For details, refer to Section 2.11.3
“Terminal & Impedance.”

Terminal : [RF ]

Figure 2.2.2-1 Terminal setting

2.2.3 Frequencies and Channels

Set the carrier frequency (Frequency) or channels (Channel) for the sig-
nals to be measured. Valid only when RF input is selected for the termi-
nal.
First, select a frequency map with the Channel Map item. The following
five frequency maps can be selected.

(1) Interim-1
Channels 13 to 32 that conform to digital terrestrial television sys-
tems. The channel center frequency deviates at the high channels
only 1/7 MHz from the center frequency of the active analog televi-
sion channel plan.
The relationship between channel numbers and frequencies is as
shown in Table 2.2.3-1.
Interim-1 and Interim-2 are set so as to conform to Channel Map for
the test broadcast operated by the Telecommunication Advancement
Organization of Japan (TAO).
(2) Interim-2
Channels 13 to 32 that conform to digital terrestrial television sys-
tems. The channel center frequency deviates at the high channels
only 0.15 MHz from the center frequency of the active analog televi-
sion channel plan.
The relationship between channel numbers and frequencies is as
shown in Table 2.2.3-2.
(3) VHF
The channel center frequency deviates at the high channels only 1/7
MHz from the center frequency of the active analog television chan-
nel plan. The relationship between channel numbers and frequen-
cies is as shown in Table 2.2.3-3.

2-17
Chapter 2 Operations

(4) UHF
Channels 13 to 62 that conform to the ARIB STD-B31 digital terres-
trial television transmission system. The channel center frequency
deviates at the high channels only 1/7 MHz from the center fre-
quency of the active analog television channel plan.
The relationship between channel numbers and frequencies is as
shown in Table 2.2.3-4.
(5) CATV
The channel center frequency deviates at the high channels only 1/7
MHz from the center frequency of the active CATV channel plan.
The relationship between channel numbers and frequencies is as
shown in Table 2.2.3-5.
(6) General
Arbitrary frequencies in 1 Hz units from 32 to 3000 MHz.
(7) IF Band
Arbitrary frequencies in 1 Hz units from 3.9 to 38 MHz. For example,
set the IF Band to 4 MHz for test evaluation of IC chips on an am-
plifier or tuner.
A different hardware control method from that of other frequency
maps is employed for IF Band to enable measurement at a lower
frequency. Therefore, the performance limit of the MER measure-
ment value may be lower than that of other frequency maps.
(8) UHF (Brazil)
Channels 14 to 69 that conform to the ABNT NBR.
The relationship between channel number and frequency is shown
in Table 2.2.3-6.

Table 2.2.3-1 Relationship between Interim-1 channels and

transmission bandwidth center frequencies

2-18
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

Table 2.2.3-2 Relationship between Interim-2 channels and

transmission bandwidth center frequencies

Channel Frequency (MHz) Channel Frequency (MHz)

13 473.15 23 533.15
14 479.15 24 539.15
15 485.15 25 545.15
16 491.15 26 551.15
17 497.15 27 557.15
18 503.15 28 563.15
19 509.15 29 569.15
20 515.15 30 575.15
21 521.15 31 581.15
22 527.15 32 587.15

Table 2.2.3-3 Relationship between VHF channel and transmission

bandwidth center frequencies

Channel Frequency (MHz) Channel Frequency (MHz)

1 93.142 857 7 191.142 857
2 99.142 857 8 195.142 857
3 105.142 857 9 201.142 857
4 173.142 857 10 207.142 857
5 179.142 857 11 213.142 857
6 185.142 857 12 219.142 857

2-19
Chapter 2 Operations

Table 2.2.3-4 Relationship between UHF channels and center fre-

quencies

2-20
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

Table 2.2.3-5 Relationship between CATV channels and frequencies

2-21
Chapter 2 Operations

Table 2.2.3-6 Relationship between UHF (Brazil) channels and center

frequencies

Next, set the frequency or channel in the Channel/Frequency item. When

Interim-1 or Interim-2 is selected for the Channel Map, specify a channel
for 13 to 32.
When VHF is selected for the Channel Map, specify a channel number
for 1 to 12.
When UHF is selected for the Channel Map, specify a channel number
for 13 to 62.
When CATV is selected for the Channel Map, specify a channel number
for 13 to 63.

2-22
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

When UHF (Brazil) is selected for the Channel Map, specify a channel
number for 14 to 69.
When General is selected for the Channel Map, set the frequency for 32
to 3000 MHz in 1 Hz units.
When IF Band is selected for the Channel Map, set the frequency for 3.9
to 38 MHz in 1 Hz units.

Frequency
Channel Map : [UHF ]
Channel / Frequency : [ 13CH]

Figure 2.2.3-1 Channel settings

Frequency
Channel Map : [General ]
Channel / Frequency : [ 500.000 000MHz]
Offset Frequency : [ 0.000 000MHz]
Spectrum : [Normal]

Figure 2.2.3-2 Frequency settings

The frequency and channel can also be set from the Freq/Channel key on
the front panel.

Freq/Channel key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 2.2.3-3 Freq/Channel key

Pressing the Freq/Channel key switches soft key contents. Press the
Frequency soft key (F2) or Channel soft key (F1) to display the pop-up
window and set the frequency or channel. Pressing the Channel Map key
(F4) changes each item of Channel Map.

2-23
Chapter 2 Operations

Frequency
/Channel
#
Entry [ 13CH]
Min 13CH Max 32CH Channel

Frequency

Figure 2.2.3-4 Setting from Freq/Channel key

2-24
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

2.2.4 Offset Frequency

The offset frequency can be set by the Offset Frequency item when Gen-
eral or IF Band is selected for Channel Map.

The offset frequency can be set from 0.000000 to 12000.000000 MHz.

When the offset frequency is set, it is added to the measured frequency
result and displayed on the Modulation Analysis screen or C/N screen.

Frequency
Channel Map : [ General ]
Channel / Frequency : [ 500.000 000MHz]
Offset Frequency : [ 8000.000 000MHz]
Spectrum : [Normal]

Figure 2.2.4-1 Offset Frequency settings

The MS8901A cannot handle the RF signal frequency exceeding 3 GHz

such as when analyzing the ISDB-T signals on the microwave line.
The RF signal must be converted up to a frequency that the MS8901A
can handle by using an external frequency converter at this time. Setting
the difference between the RF signal frequency and the frequency of the
signal to be input to the MS8901A to the offset frequency enables to dis-
play the measured frequency results as an RF signal value.

For example, when 500 MHz is set to Frequency and 10000 MHz to Off-
set Frequency, 10500 MHz (500 MHz + 10000 MHz) is displayed for the
frequency on the lower of the screen while the frequency difference shows
the value from 10500 MHz.

Frequency : 105000.000 000MHz

Pre Ampl : Off

Figure 2.2.4-2 Display when Offset Frequency is set

2-25
Chapter 2 Operations

2.2.5 Spectrum
The spectrum for 37.15-MHz IF signals in digital broadcast equipment is
reversed with respect to final RF frequency signals. In addition, the IF
signal spectrum will still be reversed when the LO signal frequency is set
higher than the RF signal frequency even when the frequency is
down-converted using an external frequency converter. Set Spectrum
when analyzing the signal where the spectrum is reversed.

Normal: Analyzes the signal with normal spectrum.

Reverse: Analyzes the signal with reversed spectrum.

Frequency
Channel Map : [ General ]
Channel / Frequency : [ 500.000 000MHz]
Offset Frequency : [ 8000.000 000MHz]
Spectrum : [Normal]

Figure 2.2.5-1 Spectrum reverse settings

The spectrum reverse can be set only when the channel map is General
or IF Band.

2-26
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

2.2.6 Level
When RF input is selected for the terminal, the input signal level can be
set. There are two methods for setting the input signal level Also the user
can choose whether or not to refer to the modulation error ratio (MER)
when adjusting the range automatically. Press the Level Cont key (F4),
one of the soft key on the second page of Setup Common Parameter
screen. Pressing the key toggles back and forth between Ref Setting and
Adjust Range.

Figure 2.2.6-1 Level Cont key

To change the setting of the auto range adjustment by the modulation

error ratio, press the Refer to MER key (F3), which is the soft key on the
2nd page. Pressing the key toggles on and off.

Figure 2.2.6-2 Refer to MER key

2-27
Chapter 2 Operations

• Auto range adjustment (Adjust Range):

Press the Level Cont soft key (F4) to set Adjust Range. The MS8901A
measures the input level up to 3 GHz and automatically sets the op-
timum range. It is used for measurement in an environment where in-
terfere waves exist, such as field tests.

Note:
Only Ref Setting is available when the frequency map is IF Band.

• Reference level setting (Ref Setting)

Pressing the Level Cont key (F4) sets RefSetting. This can be set by
hand on the front panel. It is used when the signal level is known
beforehand such as a transmitter test. The initial state is Ref Setting.

• Auto range adjustment by the modulation error ratio (Refer to MER)

This function is valid only on the Modulation Analysis screen. Press
the Refer to MER (F3) key to switch to Off state. When executing
Adjust Range with Refer to MER set to Off, the MS8901A itself the
measures the input level up to 3 GHz to set the optimal range
automatically. When executing Adjust Range with Refer to MER set to
On the MS8901A itself measures the input level up to 3 GHz and
detects the optimal ranges automatically. After it, Mode, Guard
Interval, TMCC for the input level is automatically detected and then
the modulation error ratio of the set frequency and channel is
automatically measured. After measurement, the reference level is set,
in which the modulation error ratio becomes the most adequate. This
is very useful when an unwanted wave influences highly (e.g., field
measurement).

When the environment for measurement is not stable, the operation

might be also unstable, too, when Adjust Range is executed with Refer
to MER set to On. In this case, adjust the range by hand or execute
Adjust Range again after setting Refer to MER to Off state. The initial
state is set to Off.

2-28
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

(1) Reference level setting (Ref Setting)

Input the signal level to input from the screen as the reference level.
Preamplifier Off: −26 to +10 dBm
Preamplifier On: −46 to −10 dBm

Reference : [-10dBm]

Figure 2.2.6-3 Reference level setting

The reference level can be set from the Amplitude key on the front
panel. Press the Amplitude key to change the soft key menu content,
and a pop-up window opens on the left of the Ref Level soft key (F1).
Set the reference level here.

Figure 2.2.6-4 Settings using Amplitude key

2-29
Chapter 2 Operations

Note:
When the Adjust Range is selected as the level setting (Level Cont),
there is no need to set the reference level. The following input
method is to be abbreviated.

(a) The setting item for Reference Level is not displayed on the
Setup Common Parameter screen.
(b) Even pressing Amplitude key does not display the Ref Level key
(F1).
(2) Auto range adjustment (Adjust Range)
When the Adjust Range is selected, the Adjust Range soft key (F5) is
displayed in the soft key menu of each measurement screen (Signal
Analysis, C/N, Spectrum Mask, and Frequency Counter screens).
When the Adjust Range soft key (F5) is pressed, the MS8901A
automatically measures the signal levels within the full bandwidth
(up to 3 GHz) to set the internal range to the optimum condition.
This function takes approximately two seconds.

>> EXECUTE! <<

Adjust range

Figure 2.2.6-5 Adjust Range key and screen during

Auto Range adjustment

Pressing the Adjust Range key displayed by the Amplitude key on

the front panel, can set the range automatically. However, pressing
the Amplitude key on the Setup Common Parameter screen does not
display the Adjust Range key.

2-30
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

>> EXECUTE! <<

Adjust range

Figure 2.2.6-6 Adjust range key displayed on the amplitude key menu

When Adjust Range is selected as the level setting (Level Cont), Ad-
just Range is automatically executed every time the screen is
switched to each measurement setting screen from the Setup Com-
mon Parameter screen or the Spectrum Analyzer mode.

Note:
Range is not automatically adjusted when Channel Map is IF
Band.

(3) Auto range adjustment by the modulation error ratio (Refer to MER)
When measuring the modulation error ratio (MER) at the environ-
ment like field, where the unwanted wave is high, set the Refer to
MER (Refer to the Modulation Error Ratio) to On.
If there is no unwanted wave or it is relatively low, set the Refer to
MER to off.
When pressing the Adjust Range key on the MER screen with Refer
to MER On, the MS8901A automatically measures the signal level
within the full bandwidth (up to 3 GHz) to set the internal range to
the optimal status.
Next, after detecting Mode (2.2.7), Guard Interval (2.2.8), and TMCC
(2.2.9), the modulation error ratio of the set channel is automatically
measured. After it, the reference level is set in which MER becomes
the most adequate.
This function takes approximately 15 to 25 seconds.

2-31
Chapter 2 Operations

>> EXECUTE! <<

Adjust Range for MER Measuring
Automatic detection of Signal...
■■■■□□□□□□□□□□□□

Figure 2.2.6-7 Automatic detection (auto range adjustment by the

modulcation error ratio)

Note:
When detecting the different parameter from the content of
the current Setup Common Parameter (code ratio and time
interleave are count out, for they are not included within the
setting content of this software) after the automatic detec-
tion of Mode, Guard Interval and TMCC, the Modulation
Analysis screen is automatically switched to No Trace screen.
If the parameter is found to be the same with the current
setting content, the screen is not changed.

2-32
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

>> EXECUTE! <<

Adjust Range for MER Measuring
Searching Ref Level...
■■■■□□□□□□□□□□□□

Figure 2.2.6-8 Modulation error ratio is being measured (auto range

adjustment by the modulation error ratio)

When the Adjust Range is selected as the Level Cont, including the
setting of the reference of the modulation error ratio (Refer to MER),
the Adjust Range referring to MER is automatically executed at the
switch to the Modulation Analysis screen from the Setup Common
Parameter screen or to the Modulation Analysis screen from the
spectrum analyzer mode.

2-33
Chapter 2 Operations

(4) Input level status display

An indicator that identifies where actual input levels are not appro-
priate for the input level set appears in the upper left of the screen.
The measured results may not be correct when this indicator ap-
pears. Reset the reference level or execute the auto range adjust-
ment.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Modulation Analysis (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous
Under Range Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024

Figure 2.2.6-9 Under Range Indicator

(a) Level Over

An indicator appears when the input level exceeds +10 dBm
while the pre-amplifier is set to Off. Internal circuits of the
MS8901A may be damaged at further input levels. Lower the
input level immediately.
(b) Over Range
The input level is too high against the range currently set.
Execute the auto range adjustment.
(c) Over Range (Preamp Saturated)
This is displayed when the preamplifier is on and the level of
the received signal gets higher than the uppermost limit of the
currently set range. Executing the Adjust Range in this state
can perform the measurement. However, it is only enlarging the
input attenuator, which is in the runup to the preamplifier, and
as a result does not lead to the internal setting to perform the
function. For the setting to utilize the function, set the pream-
plifier off and execute Adjust Range. Refer to Section 2.2.10
“Preamplifier”, for details on the preamplifier setting.
(d) Level Under
This is displayed when a signal lower than the rated input level
is input. Raise the input signal level. Terminal is displayed as
other than RF.

2-34
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

(e) Under Range

The current reference level might be influenced by the noise
floor of the measurement instrument. Execute the Adjust Range.
When executing the Modulation Error Ratio in an environment
including the unwanted wave like a field, set the Refer to MER
to On state and execute the Adjust Range again.
If the Under Range is displayed again after the Adjust Range
execution, switch the preamplifier to On state if it is Off state.
And execute the Adjust Range again.
If the Under Range is still displayed, it might be that the range
is set to the minimum level or the measurement level reaches to
the limit by the unwanted wave. Make sure of the existence or
nonexistence of the unwanted wave at the MS8901A spectrum
analyzer mode. If necessary, use the band pass filter.
Refer to the following section of “Under Range”, for details on
this.
(f) Carrier Unlock
Mode (2.2.7), Guard Interval (2.2.8) and TMCC (2.2.9), all of
which are set to the MS8901A do not correspond with the input
signal. Detect the signal parameter automatically. Refer to Sec-
tion 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function”.

Under Range:
Under range display shows that there is a possibility that the
noise floor of the measurement instrument influences on the
measurement value at the signal level to input. Under Range
function brings to notice there is a possibility that the specifica-
tions might not be satisfied and this does not immediately mean
the aberrance.
When executing the Adjust Range in an environment including
the unwanted wave, the Under Range does not sometimes do a
bunk. This is to avoid the distortion of the instrument by the
unwanted wave.
When measuring the Modulation Analysis, the most optimal
modulation error ratio (MER) becomes the measurement bound
of this instrument. And this optimal MER is gained when the
Refer to MER is On or the reference level is set by hand power.
If the measurement bound matters, remove the unwanted wave
beforehand using the appropriate band path filter.

2-35
Chapter 2 Operations

2.2.7 Mode
Set the input signal mode (Mode). Select from the following modes.

• Mode1
• Mode2
• Mode3

Signal
Mode : [Mode1]
Guard Interval : [1/4 ]

Figure 2.2.7-1 Mode settings

2.2.8 Guard Interval

Set the guard interval for the input signal (Guard Interval). Select from
the following.

• 1/4
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32

Signal
Mode : [Mode1]
Guard Interval : [1/4 ]

Figure 2.2.8-1 Guard Interval settings

2-36
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

2.2.9 TMCC
Set the TMCC information of the input signal.
Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control (TMCC) is a signal
used for transmitting control data. The number of segments (Segment)
and modulation system (Mod) at each layer from Layer A to Layer C are
set here.
The total number of segments from Layer A to Layer C must be 13.
When the input value total is over 13, the number of segments is auto-
matically changed from Layer_A, Layer_B and Layer_C in this order.
For example, when the number of segments of Layer_A is 10, Layer_B is
1 and Layer_C is 2, if the number of segments of Layer_C is changed to 7,
that of the Layer_A is automatically changed to 5 and that of Layer_B
remains the same (1).
The total number of segments is automatically adjusted as above so that
it is always 13.

Select the modulation system from the following.

64QAM
16QAM
QPSK
DQPSK
64QAM (PR)
16QAM (PR)
QPSK (PR)
DQPSK (PR)

The PR here is an abbreviation of Partial Reception. Make sure to select

PR items when Partial Reception signals are added to Layer A. The
number of segments at Layer A automatically becomes one at this time.

TMCC Segment Mod

Layer_A : [13] [64QAM ]
Layer_B : [ 0] [64QAM]
Layer_C : [ 0] [64QAM]

Figure 2.2.9-1 TMCC settings

2-37
Chapter 2 Operations

2.2.10 Preamplifier
A pre-amplifier is built into the RF input portion as standard with the
MS8901A. Set the pre-amplifier to On when the input signal level is low
to enhance the MS8901A’s NF (Noise Figure) to enable low level meas-
urements.
Press the Amplitude key on the front panel to change the soft key con-
tents. Then press the Preamplifier soft key (F5) to set the pre-amplifier
On/Off.

Amplitude key

Anritsu MS8901A

Amplitude

Ref Level

Pre
Amplifier
On Off

Return

Figure 2.2.10-1 Preamplifier control

Note:
Values for maximum RF input level (the level when the MS8901A
is not damaged) differ depending on the pre-amplifier On/Off set-
ting.

Preamp Off: +30 dBm

Preamp On: +10 dBm

2-38
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

For example, there is a risk of damaging the MS8901A interior if

the pre-amplifier is set to On when +20 dBm is input with the
pre-amplifier Off. Note the input level when setting the
pre-amplifier On/Off while signals are input.

2.2.11 Measurement mode

Measurement mode refers to the frequency how often measured results
should be updated. There are two measurement modes provided: con-
tinuous mode (Continuous) and single mode (Single).

The measurement mode is set on a measurement screen.

(1) Continuous mode (Continuous)

Measurements are conducted and display is updated continuously.
Press the Shift key and Single key (panel key) in succession to
switch to the continuous mode. “Measure: Continuous” will appear
in the upper part of the screen.
This mode should be used for normal measurement.

(2) Single mode (Single)

Executes measurement only once and stops when the measurement
ends. Press the Single key on the panel to switch to the single mode.
The message “Measure: Single” is displayed on the upper part of the
screen. After the measurement is finished, press the Single key to
execute the measurement again. The single mode should be used
when updating the screen during time-consuming process such as
copying a screen.

System

Continuous
Anritsu MS8901A Single

Figure 2.2.11-1 Single key and Continuous key

2-39
Chapter 2 Operations

When the Storage Mode is set to Average, the measurement mode auto-
matically switches to the Single mode. The measurement operation stops
when measurement is performed for the number set in Average Count.
“Measure: Single” on the upper right of the screen is not displayed and
goes blank at this time.
Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.

2.2.12 Initialization (Preset)

Initialization restores the measurement parameters to the values at fac-
tory shipment. It is executed when the measurement parameter settings
are unknown.

Press the Preset key on the upper left of the front panel to execute ini-
tialization.

Preset key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 2.2.12-1 Preset key

Measurement parameters are set to the following values after initializa-

tion. The Setup Common Parameter screen is displayed after initializa-
tion.

2-40
2.2 Setting Measurement Parameters

Table 2.2.12-1 Setup Common Parameter screen default

Item Default
System TV
Terminal RF
Impedance* 50 Ω
Channel Map Interim-1
Channel & Frequency 13CH
Offset Frequency 0 Hz
Spectrum Normal
Level Cont Ref Setting
Refer to MER Off
Reference Level +10 dBm
Mode Mode3
Guard Interval 1/8
Layer A Segment 13
Mod 64 QAM
Layer B Segment 0
Mod 64 QAM
Layer C Segment 0
Mod 64 QAM
Preamplifier Off
*: Not displayed when Terminal = RF.

Table 2.2.12-2 Modulation Analysis screen default

Item Default
Trace Format No Trace
Storage Mode Normal
Amount of Count 5
Refresh Interval Every
Segmentation Offset 512
Section Layer_A
Recv. Seg 13 Seg Mode
Equalizer Standard
Auto. Det. from Seg 0
Correction Off
Ampl Vertical Scale ±20 dB
MER Vertical Scale 50 dB
Threshold Offset 20.00 dB
Worst Envelope Off
Marker Trace Current
Peak Search 13 Segment

2-41
Chapter 2 Operations

Table 2.2.12-3 C/N screen default

Item Default
Integral Mode Off
Integral Start 1.000 kHz
Integral Stop 1000.000 kHz
Storage Mode Normal
Amount of Count 5
Refresh Interval Every

Table 2.2.12-4 Spectrum Mask screen default

Item Default
Mask Transmission
Equipment Standard Type A
Station Power High
Average Power 2.50 W
Number of Channel 1
Filter Default Default
Last Result On
Uncorrection Result Off
Filter Data Off
Marker Trace Last Result

Table 2.2.12-5 Frequency Counter screen default

Item Default
Storage Mode Normal
Amount of Count 5
Refresh Interval Every

Table 2.2.12-6 Other default

Item Default
Measurement Mode Continuous

2-42
2.3 Modulation Analysis

2.3 Modulation Analysis

Signals that conform to the ISDB-T can be analyzed for the following
four items:
• Frequency
• MER
• Constellation
• Frequency response
• Sub-carrier MER

Press the Modulation Analysis soft key (F1) on the Setup Common Pa-
rameter screen to move to the Modulation Analysis screen to perform
signal analysis.

Figure 2.3-1 Setup Common Parameter screen

2-43
Chapter 2 Operations

The Signal Analysis screen can be switched to four types of analysis re-
sults screens with the Trace Format soft key (F1).

Note:
Freq Response measurement cannot be performed when DQPSK is
selected for the modulation system.

No Trace screen Constellation screen Freq Response screen

Sub-carrier MER screen

Modulation
Analysis

#
No Trace
Constellation Trace
Freq Response Format
Sub-carrier MER

Figure 2.3-2 Switching to the Signal Analysis screen

2-44
2.3 Modulation Analysis

2.3.1 Frequency and MER measurement (No Trace screen)

The carrier frequency and Modulation Error Ratio (MER) of signals that
conform to the ISDB-T are measured in the No Trace screen.
MER is an index for expressing the effect of noise and distortions con-
tained in demodulation signals comprehensively.
The MER permits equivalent C/N ratios to be estimated.

（δIj, δQj）

（Ij，Qj）

Σ（Ij2 + Qj2）
MER=10log（）
Σ（δIj2 + δQj2）

Figure 2.3.1-1 Definition of MER

1 3 6 10 9 8

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Modulation Modulation Modulation

<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Analysis Analysis Analysis
Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024 #
Equalizer: Standard Signal
Trace Automatic
Frequency Format Detection
Carrier Frequency : 473.142 857 14 MHz *
Frequency Error : 0.00 Hz TMCC
0.0000 ppm Storage Automatic
Mode Detection
MER #
Conventional : 42.03 dB Equalizer
Seg Mod Standard Auto. Det.
Layer_A : 41.57 dB 1 QPSK(PR) Advanced From Seg
Layer_B : 41.34 dB 12 64QAM #
Layer_C : ----- dB 0 QPSK
Recv．Seg.
13 Seg Mode Segmentation
TMCC
AC1
: 44.07 dB
: 43.98 dB
1 Seg Mode Offset 13
AC2 : ----- dB #
Save Data
Signal Adjust to TMCC
Mode : Mode3 Range Mem Card Information
Guard Interval : 1/8 → 14
Back Auto. Det.
Screen Cancel
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

2 12 5 4 11 7

Figure 2.3.1-2 No Trace screen

2-45
Chapter 2 Operations

1: Frequency measurement
The carrier frequency for OFDM-modulated signals that conforms to
ISDB-T is measured. When the offset frequency is set, the carrier
frequency added with the set offset frequency is displayed.
The difference between the measured frequency and the set fre-
quency (frequency displayed at the bottom of the screen) is displayed
as a Frequency Error.
Note:
Offset frequency additions are only the simple adding of set-
ting values. The correct value may not be shown when there
are frequency errors in the LO signal sources of the frequency
converter.

While the frequency measurement function allows differences in the

carrier frequency of up to ±99 kHz to be tracked, the frequency dif-
ferences beyond that cannot be measured. The message “Carrier
Unlock” is displayed in the upper left of the screen when the carrier
frequency difference exceeds ±300 Hz.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Modulation Analysis (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous
Carrier Unlock Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024

Figure 2.3.1-3 Carrier Unlock display

Note:
While a certain degree of locking is available for carrier fre-
quency differences as described in the above with the fre-
quency measurement function, lock functions are not per-
formed on FFT sample clock frequency differences.

2: MER measurement
The OFDM signal conforming to ISDB-T possesses a layered struc-
ture for setting modulation systems individually per layer. The MER
values can be measured for each layer here as a result. In addition,
the MER values are measured individually for TMCC, AC and other
information carriers as they employ independent modulation sys-
tems.

Conventional:
MER value that synthesizes all sub-carriers (Data carrier for each
layer, TMCC, AC, SP, CP)
This is the total value where weight is given to the MER values from
Layer A to Layer C and for TMCC and AC using the number of
sub-carriers.

2-46
2.3 Modulation Analysis

Layer_A:
MER value at Layer A
Layer_B:
MER value at Layer B. The Segment Number for Layer B must be
set to at least one in order to measure this value.
Layer_C:
MER value at Layer C. The Segment Number for Layer C must be
set to at least one in order to measure this value.
TMCC:
MER value of the TMCC signal.
AC1:
MER value of the AC1 signal.
AC2:
MER value of the AC2 signal. The DQPSK must be set to the modu-
lation system of at least one layer from Layer A to Layer C in order
for this value to be measured.
3: Storage Mode
This parameter sets the methods for displaying the measured re-
sults on the screen. Average, Max Hold, Over Write and other modes
can be set. Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.
4: Receive of Segment
This parameter switches the partial reception signal analysis func-
tion described in Section 2.3.5 “Partial reception signal analysis
(Recv. Seg).”
5: Adjust Range
This parameter performs hardware settings appropriate for the RF
signal level. During execution, the Adjust Range execution window
opens and other processing is disabled. This parameter cannot be
executed when other than RF is selected as Terminal.
6: Equalizer
This parameter switches the Equalizer setting between Advanced
and Standard. Measurement is performed again after switching. The
setting is toggled by pressing the function menu key. The selected
item (Advanced/Standard) is shown in reverse display.
When Equalizer is set to Advanced, MER measurement can be easily
performed under conditions where the frequency response varies
significantly such as in a multipath environment. However, the Ad-
vanced setting may handle the measurement data at both ends of
frequency as invalid values during calculation. Refer to Section 1.4
“Specifications” for details. It is recommended to set Equalizer to
Standard when the measurement environment is stable.

2-47
Chapter 2 Operations

7: Segmentation Offset
This parameter specifies the position where the signal is recalled
within the OFDM symbol. Refer to Section 2.3.6 “Segmentation Off-
set” for details.
8: Signal Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects Mode, Guard Interval and
TMCC of the input signal. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.
9: TMCC Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects TMCC of the input signal. Re-
fer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function”
for details.
10: Automatic Detection segment position setting
This parameter sets which segment’s TMCC is to be used for auto-
matic TMCC detection of the input signal. The set segment position
is used from the next automatic TMCC detection. When Receive of
Segment (partial reception) is set to 1 Seg Mode, the segment posi-
tion cannot be changed. In this case, the function menu key appears
in outline characters indicating that it is disabled. Refer to Section
2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function” for details.
11: Save Data to Mem Card
This parameter saves the measured results as numerical value data
to the memory card. Refer to Section 2.12.2 “Saving numerical value
data” for details.
12: Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen
where measurement parameters are set.
13: TMCC Information
This parameter detects TMCC information of the input signal.
Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Func-
tion” for details.
14: Auto. Det. Cancel
This parameter stops detection during execution of an automatic
detection function such as Signal Automatic Detection or TMCC
Automatic Detection, and performs signal analysis with the pa-
rameters currently set. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.

2-48
2.3 Modulation Analysis

2.3.2 Constellation measurement (Constellation screen)

The constellation is used to express the symbol position of demodulated
signals diagrammatically. View this constellation to study the signal pu-
rity or the cause of failures that occur.
The MER is the numerical value converted from this constellation.

1 3 2 5 6 7 9 12 11 10

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Modulation Modulation Modulation

<< Modulation Analysis (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Analysis Analysis Analysis
Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024 #
Equalizer: Standard Signal
[Layer_A] Trace
Automatic
Format
Detection
Carrier Frequency: *
473.142 857 14 MHz TMCC
Storage
Automatic
Frequency Error : Mode
Detection
0.00 Hz # #
0.0000 ppm Equalizer
MER(Conventional) :
Section Standard
Advanced
7 Auto. Det.
From Seg
Q 42.03 dB
#
Recv. Seg
MER(Layer_A) : 13 Seg Mode Segmentation
8
41.57 dB 1 Seg Mode Offset
# 16
Save Data
Adjust to TMCC
Range Mem Card Information
Marker: 2305 symbol → 17
(I) -7.0580
I (Q) -3.0323 Back
Auto. Det.
Screen
Cancel
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

4 15 8 14 13

Figure 2.3.2-1 Constellation screen

1: Constellation
Constellation type (section) currently displayed. Refer to 6: Section
below for details.
The Conventional constellation cannot be displayed.
2: Frequency measurement
This parameter measures the carrier frequency. This is identical to
the frequency displayed on the No Trace screen.
3: MER measurement
This parameter measures the Conventional MER and the MER for
sections currently displayed. This is identical to the MER displayed
on the No Trace screen.

2-49
Chapter 2 Operations

4: Marker
The I and Q values for each symbol on the Constellation can be re-
called with the marker.
The marker is expressed in a red colored diamond shape on the
Constellation screen. It can be moved by using the Rotary Encoder.
In addition, any symbol numbers can be input directly for reading
the I and Q values at these positions. Press the Marker key on the
front panel. A pop-up window will open to input the number of sym-
bols.

Entry [ 2305]
Min:1 Max:19968

Back
Screen
Marker : 2305 symbol
1 2 3

Figure 2.3.2-2 Input the number of marker symbols

Four OFDM data are loaded in one measurement for analysis with
Signal Analysis. For example, 19968 symbol data exist in total with
Mode3. Symbol numbers are allocated automatically from the lower
frequencies of recalled data. Note that the correspondence between
the symbol number and frequency in each OFDM symbol is reversed
(higher frequency first) when the spectrum reverse setting is Re-
verse.
OFDM OFDM OFDM OFDM
Symbol No. 1 Symbol No. 2 Symbol No. 3 Symbol No. 4

Sub
Carrier ---- ---- ---- ----

Symbol
1
2
3

4990
4991
4992

4993
4994
4995

9982
9983
9984

9985
9986
9987

14974
14975
14976

14977
14978
14979

19966
19967
19968

Number

Figure 2.3.2-3 Marker symbol number

5: Storage Mode
This parameter sets the methods for displaying the measured re-
sults on the screen. Average, Max Hold, Over Write and other modes
can be set. Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.

2-50
2.3 Modulation Analysis

6: Section
Constellation types (sections) to be displayed are selected. A Con-
stellation type selected here is shown in 1: Constellation.
Press the Section key (F3). A pop-up window is opened to select the
constellation type from among these. Refer to Section 2.3.1 “Fre-
quency and MER measurement (No Trace screen)” for the selectable
constellation types.

Layer_A #
Layer_B
Layer_C Section
TMCC
AC1
AC2

Figure 2.3.2-4 Section key

7: Receive of Segment
This parameter switches the partial reception signal analysis func-
tion described in Section 2.3.5 “Partial reception signal analysis
(Recv. Seg).”
8: Adjust Range
This parameter performs hardware settings appropriate for the RF
signal level. During execution, the Adjust Range execution window
opens and other processing is disabled. This parameter cannot be
executed when other than RF is selected as Terminal.
9: Equalizer
This parameter switches the Equalizer setting between Advanced
and Standard. Refer to “6. Equalizer” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency
and MER measurement (No Trace screen)” for details.
10: Signal Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects Mode, Guard Interval and
TMCC of the input signal. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.
11: TMCC Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects TMCC of the input signal. Re-
fer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function”
for details.
12: Automatic Detection segment position setting
Sets which segment’s TMCC is to be used for automatic TMCC de-
tection of the input signal. Refer to “10. Automatic Detection seg-
ment position setting” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency and MER meas-
urement (No Trace screen)” for details.

2-51
Chapter 2 Operations

13: Segmentation Offset

This parameter specifies the position where the signal is recalled
within the OFDM symbol. Refer to Section 2.3.6 “Segmentation Off-
set” for details.
14: Save Data to Mem Card
This parameter saves the measured results as numerical value data
to the memory card. Refer to Section 2.12.2 “Saving numerical value
data” for details.
15: Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen
where measurement parameters are set.
16: TMCC Information
This parameter detects TMCC information of the input signal.
Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Func-
tion” for details.
17: Auto. Det. Cancel
This parameter stops detection during execution of an automatic
detection function such as Signal Automatic Detection or TMCC
Automatic Detection, and performs signal analysis with the pa-
rameters currently set. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.

2-52
2.3 Modulation Analysis

2.3.3 Frequency Response (Freq Response screen)

The frequency responses within the 5.6 MHz band are displayed by using
the CP and SP signals.

Note:
Freq Response measurement cannot be performed when DQPSK is
selected for the modulation system of any layer.

10
8 7 6 11
1 2 14
12

5 9 17 16
4 3 19
15

Figure 2.3.3-1 Freq Response screen

1: Full frequency response display

This parameter displays the frequency response in the 5.6 MHz
band. The frequency responses are displayed in relative values, as-
suming the average power for the entire band as 0 dB. The horizon-
tal axis is the segment number.
2: Magnify window
This parameter magnifies the segment of this window and displays
it to the bottom of the screen. This magnify window can be moved
horizontally using the Step key on the front panel.

2-53
Chapter 2 Operations

3: Magnify display for frequency response

This parameter magnifies the position where the magnify window is
located for display.
4: Marker
The marker point is where the diamond shape in the magnify win-
dow is located. The frequency and relative level at the marker posi-
tion are magnified and displayed to the lower part of the screen.
The marker can be moved horizontally using the Rotary Encoder on
the front panel.
5: Frequency and relative level at marker position
The frequency and relative level at the marker point are displayed.
The frequency is displayed in absolute values. The relative level is
based assuming the power in 5.6-MHz band as 0 dB.
6: Ampl Vertical Scale
This parameter sets the displays range of the relative level axis
(vertical axis) from ±2 dB to ±50 dB.
Press the Ampl Vertical Scale key (F1) located on page 2 of the soft
key menu to change the soft key contents to a list of vertical scales.
Select from among these.

Modulation Vertical
Analysis Scale

*
Ampl
Vertical ±2dB
Scale

±5dB

±10dB

Segmentation ±20dB
Offset
#
Save Data
to ±50dB
Mem Card

Return

12 1

Figure 2.3.3-2 Relative level axis settings

2-54
2.3 Modulation Analysis

7: Correction
Frequency response can be corrected with an external signal source.
A method of use similar to the Network Analyzer is available.
Press the Correction soft key (F3) to change the soft key contents.

Modulation
Analysis Correction

Trace Correction
Format On Off
*

Storage
Mode
*

Correction Calibration

Recv. Seg
13 Seg Mode
1 Seg Mode

Adjust
Range
→

Back return
Screen

1 2 3 1

Figure 2.3.3-3 Frequency response correction

Calibration:
Pressing this key loads the frequency response data currently being
measured, sets Correction On and starts measurement again.
Data loaded by Calibration is kept while the power is supplied to the
MS8901A (data is erased when power is shut off).

Correction On/Off:
Controls whether frequency response correction functions are exe-
cuted with data loaded by Calibration.
Press this key to switch (toggle) On/Off.

When Correction is set to On, “Cal” or “Uncal” is displayed at the

upper left of the screen. “Uncal” indicates that correction has failed.
In addition, this indication may change when the setting for after
executing Calibration has changed.

When the settings for Receive of Segment and Equalizer are not
changed after executing Calibration, “Cal” is displayed indicating
that the correction value is valid. If the setting for Receive of Seg-
ment or Equalizer is changed after executing Calibration, or Cali-
bration has not been executed, “Uncal” is displayed. However, if Re-
ceive of Segment is set to 13 segments when Calibration is executed,
frequency response data in a sufficient range has already fetched, so
even if the setting is changed to 1 segment, “Cal” is therefore dis-
played instead of “Uncal”.

2-55
Chapter 2 Operations

Figure 2.3.3-4 Valid (Cal)/invalid (Uncal) display for correction

8: Receive of Segment
This parameter switches the partial reception signal analysis func-
tion described in Section 2.3.5 “Partial reception signal analysis
(Recv. Seg).”
9: Adjust Range
This parameter performs hardware settings appropriate for the RF
signal level. During execution, the Adjust Range execution window
opens and other processing is disabled. This parameter cannot be
executed when other than RF is selected as Terminal.
10: Equalizer
This parameter switches the Equalizer setting between Advanced
and Standard. Refer to “6. Equalizer” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency
and MER measurement (No Trace screen)” for details.
11: Signal Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects Mode, Guard Interval and
TMCC of the input signal. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.
12: TMCC Automatic Detection
This parameter automatically detects TMCC of the input signal. Re-
fer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function”
for details.
13: Automatic Detection segment position setting
This parameter sets which segment’s TMCC is to be used for auto-
matic TMCC detection of the input signal. Refer to “10. Automatic
Detection segment position setting” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency and
MER measurement (No Trace screen)” for details.

2-56
2.3 Modulation Analysis

14: Storage Mode

This parameter sets the methods for displaying the measured re-
sults on the screen. Average, Max Hold, Over Write and other modes
can be set. Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.
15: Segmentation Offset
This parameter specifies the position where the signal is recalled
within one OFDM symbol. Refer to Section 2.3.6 “Segmentation Off-
set” for details.
16: Save Data to Mem Card
This parameter saves constellation I and Q data to the memory card.
Refer to Section 2.12.2 “Saving numerical value data” for details.
17: Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen
where measurement parameters are set.
18: TMCC Information
This parameter detects TMCC information of the input signal.
Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Func-
tion” for details.
19: Auto. Det. Cancel
This parameter stops detection during execution of an automatic
detection function such as Signal Automatic Detection or TMCC
Automatic Detection, and performs signal analysis with the pa-
rameters currently set. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter
Automatic Detection Function” for details.

2-57
Chapter 2 Operations

2.3.4 Sub-Carrier MER Screen

Sub-carrier MER existing within the 5.6 MHz bandwidth is displayed by
bar chart.

2
1 11 19 10 12 16
4 5
17

8
18

15
3
20

6 23

24
7

13 14
9 22 21

Figure 2.3.4-1 Sub-carrier MER screen

1: Full display of the sub-carrier MER

Sub-carrier MER within 5.6 MHz band is displayed by bar chart.
The top line is displayed in the absolute value, which is fixed to 0 dB.
The horizontal axis is the segment number.
If the Worst Envelope is On, the worst value of the measured
sub-carrier MER is displayed in line graph. The display range of the
horizontal and vertical axis are displayed in bar chart.
2: Magnify window
This parameter magnifies the segment with this window to display
on the lower side of the screen. This magnify window can be moved
horizontally using the Step key on the front panel.

2-58
2.3 Modulation Analysis

3: Enlarged display of sub-carrier MER

This parameter magnifies the segment at the specified position
where the magnify window exists. If the Worst Envelope is On, the
measured sub-carrier MER is displayed in the line graph. The dis-
play range of the horizontal and vertical axis are the same with the
ones for the bar-chart display.
4: MER (Conventional)
This parameter measures the Conventional MER. This conventional
MER is the same one with the MER displayed on the No Trace
screen.
5: Threshold
This parameter sets the threshold for the sub-carrier MER. This
parameter displays the sub-carrier worse than the threshold in a
different color within the bar graph. MER threshold is the value in
which the value of Threshold Offset at 11 is subtracted from that of
the Conventional MER.
6: Marker
The rhomboid point on the enlarged display is the marker point. The
marker follows the waveform, but the waveform to follow can be
chosen between the waveform of the bar chart and the one of the line
graph.
Press the Marker key on the front panel and the Marker Trace key
(F2) continuously on the marker menu to open the pop-up window.
At this point, choose the waveform to follow for the marker.
(a) Current
The marker follows the waveform of the bar chart of the
sub-carrier MER.
(b) Worst
The marker follows the line graph of the sub-carrier MER.
However, if the line graph is not displayed, this is not select-
able.

2-59
Chapter 2 Operations

Figure 2.3.4-2 Marker menu (Sub-carrier MER screen)

Set the marker position by using the Marker Position key on

the Marker menu or by moving the rotary encoder on the front
panel horizontally.
7: Frequency and MER of the marker point
This parameter displays the marker point frequency and MER.
Frequency and MER are displayed in absolute value.
8: Peak
The peak point is the rhombic point displayed in a different color
from marker. The peak follows the waveform just as the marker, but
cannot be moved. This is to show only the worst value of the wave-
form MER at the bar chart as the peak point.
Change over the specification of the following.
Press the Peak Search key on the front panel and then select the
peak operation of the Peak Search menu.
(a) 13 Segment
This parameter displays the worst value of the waveform MER
of the bar graph as peak. However, if the partial reception sig-
nal analysis is 1 Seg Mode, this cannot be selectable. Refer to
Section 2.3.5 “Partial reception signal analysis”, for details on
the signal analysis.
(b) Worst
This parameter shows the worst value of the waveform MER on
the enlarged display.

2-60
2.3 Modulation Analysis

Figure 2.3.4-3 Peak Search menu (Sub-carrier MER screen)

9: Frequency and MER of the peak position

This parameter displays the frequency and MER of the peak point.
Both are displayed in absolute value. When hiding the peak point,
*** is displayed.

2-61
Chapter 2 Operations

10: MER vertical scale

This parameter sets the display range of the MER axis (vertical axis)
and changes the range of 20 to 60 dB. When pressing the MER Ver-
tical Scale key (F1) on the second page of the soft key, the content of
the soft key is changed. Select the display range.

Figure 2.3.4-4 MER axis setting

11: Threshold Offset

This parameter sets the Threshold Offset. The range can be changed
between 0 to 30 dB. When pressing the Threshold Offset key (F3) on
the first page of the soft key, the pop-up window appears. Input the
threshold offset in dB unit (input up to two decimal points).
This parameter sets the threshold as the normal measurement data
on the sub-carrier MER screen and also modifies the color of the
waveform of the bar chart when there is the sub-carrier worse than
the threshold. Though the threshold is based on the Conventional
MER, general versatility is enhanced by making the arbitrary value
as the threshold offset.
When MER is worsened by the intermissive occurrence of the un-
wanted wave, of which level is lower than the expectant wave, this is
useful to specify the unwanted frequency.
12: Worst Envelope
This parameter displays or hides the Worst Envelope line (Worst
Envelope). On the sub-carrier MER screen, the worst value of the
measured sub-carrier MER can be displayed as the line graph. This
Worst Envelope line updates the value smaller than the one which
has been already held, basing on the Current, the waveform of the

2-62
2.3 Modulation Analysis

normal measured data. And this operates as if to hold the storage

mode as Max Hold.
As to the normal measurement data on the sub-carrier MER screen,
the MS8901A operates as normal, though the storage mode is held
as maximum (Max Hold). Refer to Section, “2.7 Storage Mode”.
Use the Worst Envelope line to assume the occurrence feature of the
disturbing wave, by comparing between the current measured result
and the time-series measured result.
13: Receive of Segment
This function is useful to switch the signal analysis function of the
partial reception signal described at the Section 2.3.5 “Partial Re-
ception Signal Analysis (Recv. Seg) ”.
14: Adjust Range
This parameter sets the hardware suited to the RF signal level. This
parameter displays the window to show the Adjust Range is in exe-
cution and does not accept any other processing during execution.
When other than RF is selected as Terminal, this Adjust Range is
not executed.
15: Equalizer
This parameter switches the Advanced /Standard of the equalizer.
Refer to “6. Euqalizer” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency and MER meas-
urement (No trace screen)”.
16: Signal Automatic Detection
This parameter detects the Mode, Guard Interval and TMCC of the
input signal automatically. Refer to Section 2.10 “Automatic Detec-
tion of the Signal Parameter”.
17: TMCC Automatic Detection
This parameter detects the TMCC input signal automatically. Refer
to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function”.
18: Setting of Automatic Detection Segment Position
This parameter decides which segment TMCC is used to detect
TMCC automatically. Refer to “10. Automatic Detection Segment
Position Setting ” in Section 2.3.1 “Frequency and MER measure-
ment”.
19: Storage Mode
This parameter sets average, Max hold and overwriting of the
measured result. Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode”.
20: Segmentation Offset
This parameter specifies the position to hew out the signal among
the IOFDM symbols. Refer to Section 2.3.6 “Segmentation Offset”.

2-63
Chapter 2 Operations

21: Save Data to Mem Card

This parameter saves the I, Q data of the constellation to memory
card. Refer to Section 2.12.2 “Saving numerical value data”.
22: Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common parameter to set the
measurement parameter.
23: TMCC Information
This parameter detects the TMCC information of the input signal.
Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Func-
tion”.
24: Auto. Det. Cancel
This parameter terminates the detection while the automatic detec-
tion function is executed such as Signal Automatic Detection and
TMCC Automatic Detection and executes the signal analysis, keep-
ing the current parameter as it is. Refer to Section 2.10 “Signal Pa-
rameter Automatic Detection Function”.

2.3.5 Partial reception signal analysis (Recv. Seg)

Signal analysis (frequency measurement and MER measurement) can be
performed for all 13 segments (13 Seg Mode) or one of the segments (1
Seg Mode).

11 9 7 5 3 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12

Measurement range of 1 Seg Mode

Measurement range of 13 Seg Mode

Figure 2.3.5-1 Partial reception

Toggle between the modes from the function menu. Reverse display indi-
cates the selected mode.

1 Seg Mode can be set only when Mod of Layer_A is set to QPSK (PR),
16QAM (PR), 64QAM (PR) or DQPSK (PR). With settings other than the
above, the function menu appears in outline characters indicating that it
is disabled.

2-64
2.3 Modulation Analysis

When 1 Seg Mode is selected, Trace screens change as shown below.

(1) On the No Trace screen, Layer_B and C become “----” (dashes).

Figure 2.3.5-2 No Trace screen – partial reception

2-65
Chapter 2 Operations

(2) On the Constellation screen, the Section key item includes only
Layer_A, TMCC, AC1 and AC2.

Figure 2.3.5-3 Constellation screen – partial reception

(3) On the Freq Response screen, only 1 Seg is available as a measure-

ment target. Segments therefore cannot be moved by pressing the
or hard keys.

Figure 2.3.5-4 Freq Response screen – partial reception

2-66
2.3 Modulation Analysis

(4) Pressing the key of and on the Sub-carrier MER screen

cannot move the segment, for the measuring object is only 1 Seg. 13
Segment cannot be selected by Peak Search function.

Figure 2.3.5-5 Sub-carrier MER screen at the partical reception

2-67
Chapter 2 Operations

2.3.6 Segmentation Offset

A guard band is provided for OFDM that conform to ISDB-T before each
OFDM symbol to increase tolerance under multipath environments.
Segmentation offset refers to specifying where one OFDM symbol length
should be recalled from, including this guard interval.
Measured results may be improved by changing the segmentation offset
under multipath environments.

2048 0

OFDM symbol GI OFDM Symbols GI

Signal recalling range Mode3, GI: 1/4

Figure 2.3.6-1 Segmentation offset

Numbers are assigned with segmentation offset whereby the last of the
guard interval is set to 0. The maximum segmentation offset is set ac-
cording to the mode and guard interval as shown in Table 2.3.6-1.

Table 2.3.6-1 Segmentation offset range

Guard interval
Mode 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32

Mode1 0 to 512 0 to 256 0 to 128 0 to 64

Mode2 0 to 1024 0 to 512 0 to 256 0 to 128
Mode3 0 to 2048 0 to 1024 0 to 512 0 to 256

The initial segmentation offset is located at the center of the guard in-
terval.

2-68
2.4 C/N Measurement (C/N Screen)

2.4 C/N Measurement (C/N Screen)

Phase noise such as signal source and VCO is measured.
This measurement differs from the MER and Constellation measurement
as it is performed on CW (continuous wave).

Note:
C/N measurement cannot be performed when frequency map is IF
Band.

2.4.1 C/N measurement

Press the C/N soft key on the Setup Common Parameter screen. The
screen changes to the C/N measurement screen.

2 1 4 7 6 5

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< C/N (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous C/N C/N
Storage : Normal
[dBc/Hz] #
-40
Carrier Frequency : 473.142 857 10 MHz Integral
Frequency Error : 0.20 Hz Start
-50 0.0002 ppm * #

-60 Integral C/N : ****** dBc Storage Integral

(9 999.999kHz -10 000.000kHz) Mode Stop

-70
Integral
Off On
-80

-90

#
-100 Save Data
Adjust to
Range Mem Card
-110
→
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000[kHz]
Marker: 100.00 kHz -101.05 dBc/Hz (CW：-810.5dBc) Back
Screen
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 12 12

3 9 8
Figure 2.4.1-1 C/N measurement screen

1: Frequency measurement:
Measures the CW frequency.
When the offset frequency is set, the measured result (CW fre-
quency) added with the set offset frequency is displayed.
The difference between the measured frequency and the set fre-
quency (frequency displayed at the bottom of the screen) is displayed
as a Frequency Error.

2-69
Chapter 2 Operations

Note:
Offset frequency additions are only the simple adding of setting
values. The correct value may not be shown when there are fre-
quency errors in the Local signal sources of the frequency con-
verter.

2: Marker
The marker is a diamond shaped point for recalling C/N values.
The offset frequency and C/N value at the marker position are dis-
played at the bottom of the screen. The marker can be moved using
the Rotary Encoder.
3: Offset frequency and C/N value
The offset frequency and C/N value at the marker position.
The value of “CW: ***dBc” in the parentheses is the D/U ratio for
spurious signals. For the noise component, only levels where the
FFT sample frequency is converted to 1 Hz bands are extracted.
The unwanted signals are also calculated in the same way, thus they
are not displayed correctly on the waveform at this time.
“CW:***dBc" is, therefore, provided to display the D/U ratio for such
unwanted signals correctly.
4: Storage Mode
This parameter sets the methods for displaying the measured re-
sults on the screen. Average, Max Hold, Over Write and other modes
can be set. Refer to Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.
5: Integral Start
This parameter sets the start frequency position of the integration
range. The setting range is within the horizontal axis frequency
range of the C/N graph on screen (0.100 to 9999.999 kHz). However,
the range cannot exceed the stop frequency position (Integral Stop).
Integral Start can be set only by inputting a numeric value from the
numeric keypad (cannot be input by using step keys or the Rotary
Encoder). The minimum unit is 1 Hz.
6: Integral Stop
This parameter sets the stop frequency position of the integration
range. The setting range is within the horizontal axis frequency
range of the C/N graph on screen (0.101 to 10000.000 kHz). However,
the range cannot exceed the start frequency position (Integral Start).
The rest is the same as the start frequency position (Integral Start).

2-70
2.4 C/N Measurement (C/N Screen)

7: Integral
This parameter toggles Integral Mode On/Off. When Integral Mode
is On, the integration results are displayed. The integration result
range that can be output is from –99.99 to 0.00 dBc.
8: Save Data to Mem Card
This parameter saves C/N measured results to the memory card as
numerical value data. Refer to Section 2.12 “Saving Measurement
Data” for details.
9: Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen
where measurement parameters are set.

2-71
Chapter 2 Operations

2.5 Spectrum Mask

Performs input signal spectrum measurement in order to check whether
the spectrum conforms to the specifications of the Equipment Standard.
Arbitrary masks can also be set for measurement.

Note:
This measurement cannot be performed when Channel Map is IF
Band.

The Equipment Standard indicates the transmission spectrum mask de-

scribed in “ARIB STD-B31”and “ABNT NBR 15601.”
The MX890120B can measure in three types for pass-fail judgment of the
transmission spectrum mask that conforms to the Equipment Standard.

1: Type A
This type A conforms to the specification of the ARIB STD-B31 1.5
version. And the measurement only for 1 channel is performed at
this type. The frequency measurement width (Span) is 20 MHz (±10
MHz). And this type canonicalizes the whole spectrum waveform so
that the top line of the spectrum mask comes to be 0.00 dB. Both
ends of the mask line are relative level, which are declined by 50 dB
from the top line.
2: Type B
This type B conforms to the specification of the ARIB STD-B31 revi-
sion. ARIB STD-B31 conforms to the spectrum mask measurement
described at the investigation report from the Spurious Committee
(Document of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication:
29 November 2004). At type B, the measurement of up to three
channels is performed. When measuring the 1 channel, the fre-
quency measurement width (Span) is 30 MHz (±15 MHz), and it is
increased by 6 MHz every time 1 channel is added.
This function canonicalizes the whole spectrum waveform so that
the top line of the spectrum mask is –27.40 dB.
Both ends of the mask line is −50 dB as the reset. By inputting the
transmitter output power of the transmitter and relay station, this
type judges pass or fail, searching for the appropriate mask line
automatically among the range of −50 to −30 dB.
3: Brazil
Brazil conforms to the specification of the ABNT NBR 15601 revision.
This type measures only for one channel.
The frequency measurement width (Span) is 30 MHz (±15 MHz).

2-72
2.5 Spectrum Mask

This type canonicalizes the whole spectrum waveform so that the top
line of the spectrum mask comes to be –27.40 dB.
This type judges pass or fail, setting the appropriate mask line from
the station power matching the transmit output power of the trans-
mitter and relay station.

2.5.1 Spectrum mask measurement

Press the Spectrum Mask soft key on the Setup Common Parameter
screen. The screen switches to the spectrum mask measurement screen.

5 12
7
11

3
13

8
14
9，10

6
15

1
16

17
2

Figure 2.5.1-1 Spectrum Mask screen

1. Spectrum waveform
This parameter displays the measured spectrum waveform and
spectrum mask line. Spectrum is measured under the following
conditions prescribed in the transmission spectrum mask specifi-
cations in “ARIB STD-B31”and “ABNT NBR 15601.”

RBW: 10 kHz
VBW: 300 Hz
Span: (1) 20 MHz * ARIB STD-B31 1.5 version
(2) 30 MHz/36 MHz/42 MHz

2-73
Chapter 2 Operations

* ARIB STD-B31 revision conformed to the spectrum

mask measurement of the investigation report from
Spurious Committee (document of the Ministry of In-
ternal Affairs and Communications 29, November
2004)
(3) 30 MHz
* ABNT NBR 15601
The frequency measurement width (Span) is determined by the
Equipment Standard and the number of channel.
(a) When the Equipment Standard is type A
Span is 20 MHz. This type measures one of the set channel, re-
gardless of the setting of the channel number when the type A is
the Equipment Standard before revision.
The center frequency of the frequency axis becomes the center
frequency when channel map is Interim-1, Interim-2, UHF, or
UHF (Brazil). For example, it becomes 473 MHz at 13 ch. This
frequency is displayed in parentheses indicated. When Channel
Map is set to General, the set frequency becomes directly the
center frequency without any change.
(b) When the Equipment Standard is type B and channel number is
only 1
Span is 30 MHz and this type measures only one channel.
When the center frequency of the frequency axis is channel set
frequency when channel map is interim-1, interim-2, UHF, or
UHF (Brazil). For example, it becomes 473.142857 MHz at 13
ch when Channel Map is set to UHF. When Channel Map is set
to General, the set frequency becomes directly the center fre-
quency without any change.
In both cases, the frequency is displayed in parentheses indi-
cated.
(c) When the Equipment Standard is type B and channel number is
2
Span is 36 MHz and this type measures two channels. The left
channel becomes the channel specified by channel or frequency.
The center frequency of the frequency axis is the value in which
3 MHz is added to the set frequency of the channel, when
channel map is Interim-1, Interim-2, UHF, or UHF (Brazil). For
example, it becomes 476.142857 MHz at 13 ch when Channel
Map is set to UHF. When Channel Map is set to General, the
center frequency is the value in which 3 MHz is added to the set

2-74
2.5 Spectrum Mask

frequency. In both cases, the frequency is displayed in paren-

theses indicated.
(d) When the Equipment Standard is type B and channel number is
3
Span is 42 MHz and this type measures three channels. The
leftmost channel is the channel specified by channel or fre-
quency.
The center frequency of the frequency axis is the value in which
6 MHz is added to the channel set frequency, when channel map
is Interim-1, Interim-2, UHF, or UHF (Brazil). For example, it
becomes 479.142857 MHz at 13 ch when Channel Map is set to
UHF. When channel Map is set to General, the center frequency
is the value in which 6 MHz id added to the set frequency. In
both cases, the frequency is displayed in parentheses indicated
(e) When the Equipment Standard is Brazil
Span is 30 MHz and this type measures one channel. The center
frequency of the frequency axis corresponds to the channel fre-
quency when Channel Map is Interim-1, Interim-2, UHF, or
UHF (Brazil). For example, when Channel Map is UHF (Brazil),
it becomes 473.142857 MHz at 14 ch. When Channel Map is
General, the set frequency becomes the center frequency. In
both cases, the frequency is displayed within parenthesis. As a
measurement result, the spectrum waveform after filter correc-
tion (Last Result), the spectrum waveform before filter correc-
tion (Uncorrection Result), and the filter characteristics mask
line (Filter Data) are displayed.

2. Sweep progress indicating bar

It takes approximately about 20 to 80 seconds for one spectrum
waveform measurement (When the Equipment Standard is Type B
and the number of channel is 3). The progress of the measurement is
displayed on this bar indicator. Start from the left edge of the indi-
cator part of the spectrum waveform. One measurement ends when
the right edge is reached.
3. Marker
The marker is a diamond shaped point where spectrum waveforms
are recalled. The frequency and relative level at the marker position
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The marker can be moved
using the Rotary Encoder.
For Brazil type, you can switch the waveform display using the
Marker Trace setting.

2-75
Chapter 2 Operations

4. Frequency and relative level

These are the frequency and the relative level at the marker position
of the spectrum waveform.
5. Mask Transmission
This parameter selects the spectrum mask. Press the Mask Trans-
mission soft key (F1). The soft key contents are changed to those
where mask specifications are selected.

2-76
2.5 Spectrum Mask

Figure 2.5.1-2 Spectrum mask selection

The names of masks selected are displayed in the soft keys. User-1
and User-2 are not displayed when spectrum mask data is not re-
called to the MS8901A.

2-77
Chapter 2 Operations

Transmission:
This is the transmission spectrum mask prescribed in the transmis-
sion spectrum mask specifications in “ARIB STD-B31” and “ABNT
NBR 15601." There are three types of the Equipment Standard for
the mask specifications: type A, type B, and Brazil are shown below
respectively.
[dB]
0

–20

–27

–50

–10 –4.22 –2.72 0.0 +3.0 +4.5 +10 [MHz]

–2.86 –2.65 +2.93 +3.14

Figure 2.5.1-3 Transmission Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Type A)

[dB]
–27.4

–47.4
Varying range

–55.4
–57.4

–77.4
–15 –4.36 –2.86 0.0 +2.86 +4.36 +15 [MHz]
–3.00 –2.79 +2 .79 +3.00

Figure 2.5.1-4 Transmission Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Type B)

2-78
2.5 Spectrum Mask

[dB]
–27.4

–47.4

–61.4

–77.4

–94.4

–124.4

–15 –9.0 –4.5 –2.79 +2.79 +4.5 +9.0 +15

–3.15 –2.86 +2.86 +3.15 [MHz]
–3.00 0.0 +3.00

Figure 2.5.1-5 Transmission Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Type Brazil, Station Power: Critical)

[dB]
–27.4

–47.4

–61.4
–70.4

–87.4

–117.4

–15 –9.0 –4.5 –2.79 +2.79 +4.5 +9.0 +15

–3.15 –2.86 +2.86 +3.15 [MHz]
–3.00 0.0 +3.00

Figure 2.5.1-6 Transmission Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Brazil, Station Power: Sub-Critical)

2-79
Chapter 2 Operations

[dB]
–27.4

–47.4

–54.4
–63.4

–80.4

–110.4

–15 –9.0 –4.5 –2.79 +2.79 +4.5 +9.0 +15

–3.15 –2.86 +2.86 +3.15 [MHz]
–3.00 0.0 +3.00

Figure 2.5.1-7 Transmission Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Brazil, Station Power: Non-Critical)

When the Equipment Standard is type A, the transmission spectrum

mask makes the 0.0 MHz frequency axis as the channel center fre-
quency. About 1/7 MHz displacement from the center frequency of
the transmission band.
When the Equipment Standard is type B, the transmission spectrum
mask adds the 1/7 MHz compensation and the mask becomes axi-
symmetrical based on 0.0 MHz. Therefore, there is no displacement.
Both ends of the mask vary, depending on the value of the station
power and average power.
When the Equipment Standard is Brazil, the transmission spectrum
mask adds the 1/7 MHz compensation and the mask becomes axi-
symmetrical based on 0.0 MHz. Therefore, there is no displacement.
Both ends of the mask vary, depending on the value of the station
power.

User-1 and User-2:

Two arbitrary spectrum masks can be set. These soft keys cannot be
displayed when the spectrum mask line is not recalled within the
MS8901A. Refer to Section 2.5.2 “Recalling spectrum mask line” for
the method to load spectrum mask lines.
Besides, when the Equipment Standard is type B or Brazil and the
arbitrary spectrum mask is used, both of the station power and av-
erage power cannot be set.

2-80
2.5 Spectrum Mask

6. Spectrum mask
The spectrum mask selected in 5: Mask Transmission is displayed
on the spectrum waveform.
The position relationship of the spectrum mask and spectrum mask
waveform is adjusted so that the top line of the spectrum mask (the
range of 0 dB or −27.4 dB) matches the average of the parts corre-
sponding to the spectrum waveform.

Note:
When the Equipment Standard is type A, the top line is 0 dB.
And it is −27.4 dB at type B or Brazil.

Average the spectrum waveform in this range

and match the result to the upper part of
spectrum mask.
Spectrum mask
0 dB
or
－27.4 dB

Spectrum waveform

Figure 2.5.1-8 Spectrum mask and spectrum waveform alignment

2-81
Chapter 2 Operations

7. Pass-fail judgment
Judges whether the measured spectrum waveform is in the spec-
trum mask. It is judged to have passed when the relative level of the
spectrum waveform does not exceed the spectrum mask. It is also
judged to have passed when the spectrum waveform overlaps on the
spectrum mask. Note that the top line of the spectrum mask is not
included in this judgment.
At Brazil, pass-fail judgment is performed for the spectrum wave-
form after filter correction (Last Result). The pass-fail judgment re-
sult is displayed even when the spectrum waveform display after
filter correction is set to Off.
No pass-fail
judgment

Pass-fail Pass-fail
j udgment judgment
[dB]

+2 0

+1 0

–1 0
–2 0
–3 0
–4 0
–5 0
–6 0
–7 0
–10.0 0.0 +10.0 [MHz]

Figure 2.5.1-9 Spectrum mask pass fail judgment range

(Equipment Standard: Type A)

No pass-fail
j udgment

Pass-fail Pass-fail
j udgment judgment
[dB]

–1 0
–2 0
–3 0
–4 0
–5 0
–6 0
–7 0
–8 0
–9 0
–10.0 0.0 +10.0 [MHz]

Figure 2.5.1-10 Spectrum mask pass fail judgment range

2-82
2.5 Spectrum Mask

(Equipment Standard: Type B, Number of channel: 1)

No pass-fail
judgment

Pass-fail Pass-fail
j udgment judgment
[dB]

–2 0
–3 5
–5 0
–6 5
–8 0
–9 5
–11 0
–12 5
–14 0
–15 5
–15.0 0.0 +15.0 [MHz]

Figure 2.5.1-11 Spectrum mask pass fail judgment range

(Equipment Standard: Brazil)

Note:
While the spectrum mask should apply only to the distorted
components according to the transmission spectrum mask
specifications in “ARIB STD-B31” and “ABNT NBR 15601,”
any spectrum waveform exceeding the spectrum mask is
judged as “Fail” in this pass-fail judgment regardless of
whether it is distorted component or spurious. Final pass-fail
judgment should be determined based on observation made by
the operator.

8. Equipment Standard
This parameter switches to type A, type B, or Brazil of the Equip-
ment Standard. At switching, the measurement is performed again.
When pressing the Equipment Standard (F2) of the function menu,
the pop up window appears. Select the type of the Equipment Stan-
dard.
Refer to “1. Spectrum Waveform”, “5. Mask Transmission” “6. Spec-
trum Mask” and “7. Pass-fail judgment” on this paragraph.
9. Station Power
This parameter switches between High, Low, and 30 dB Mask of the
station power when the Equipment Standard is type B. This pa-
rameter switches between Critical, Sub-Critical, and Non-Critical of
the station power when the Equipment Standard is Brazil. Meas-
urement is not performed again after switching. Only pass-fail
judgment described in “7. Pass-fail judgment” is performed.

2-83
Chapter 2 Operations

When pressing the Station Setting (F3) on the first page of soft key,
menu key content is changed. Press the Station Power (F1) to set the
toggle. The selected High/Low item displays in a reverse way.
When the Equipment Standard is Type A, station setting menu is
not opened, which sets the station power and average power. In this
case, the characters on the function menu key turn out to be white
and this key becomes invalid.
When the Equipment Standard is Brazil, the average power cannot
be set. In this case, the characters of the function menu key display
in white and this key becomes invalid.

Figure 2.5.1-12 Station Power (Type B)

When Mask is User-1 or User-2 and also the Equipment Standard
is type A, setting of the station power does not influence the Spec-
trum Mask measurement.
When specifying the Mask Transmission and setting the station
power to High with the Equipment Standard type B, both ends’
level of the spectrum mask is fixed to –77.4 dB.
When specifying the Mask Transmission and setting the station
power to Low with the Equipment Standard type B, both ends’ level
of the spectrum mask is varied among the range of –67.4 to –77.4
dB.
When specifying Mask Transmission and setting the station power
to 30 dB Mask with the Equipment Standard type B, both end’s
level of the spectrum mask is varied among the range of −57.4 to
−67.4. Refer to “10. Average Power” for details.

2-84
2.5 Spectrum Mask

Figure 2.5.1-13 Station Power (Brazil)

If Mask Transmission is specified, the Equipment Standard is Brazil,

and the station power is set to Critical, the levels at both ends of the
spectrum mask are fixed to –124.4 dB.
If Mask Transmission is specified, the Equipment Standard is Brazil,
and the station power is set to Sub-Critical, the levels at both ends of
the spectrum mask are fixed to –117.4 dB.
If Mask Transmission is specified, the Equipment Standard is Brazil,
and the station power is set to Non-Critical, the levels at both ends of
the spectrum mask are fixed to –110.4 dB.

When measuring the spectrum mask of which average of the trans-

mitter output power of the transmission and relay station exceeds
over 2.50 W, set the station power to High. If the average transmit-
ter output power is from 0.25 W to 2.50 W, set the station power to
Low. If the average transmitter output power is less than 0.25 W, set
the station power to 30 dB Mask.
10. Average Power
This parameter sets the average power. Even if modifying the setting,
the measurement is not performed again and only the pass-fail
judgment described in “7. Pass-fail judgment” is performed. When
pressing the Station Setting (F3) on the first page of soft key, menu
key content is changed. When pressing the Average Power (F2), the
pop-up window appears on the screen. Input the average of the
transmitter output power of the transmission or relay station in W
unit (Input up to two decimal points). (Up to two digits following the
decimal point are valid if the station power is Low, and up to three
digits following the decimal point are valid if the station power is 30
dB Mask.)
2-85
Chapter 2 Operations

If the station power is High, Critical, Sub-Critical, or Non-Critical,

the average power cannot be changed. In this case, the entry field for
Average Power is highlighted, indicating that this function key is not
available.

Figure 2.5.1-14 Average Power

The average power setting does not affect the Spectrum Mask meas-
urement in the following cases:
When Mask is User-1 or User-2 with the type A Equipment Standard
When Mask is User-1 or User-2 with the station power set to High
and the type B Equipment Standard
When Mask is User-1 or User-2 with the Brazil Equipment Standard
If the average power is changed while Mask Transmission is speci-
fied, the Equipment Standard is type B, and the station power is
Low or 30 dB Mask, the levels at both ends of the spectrum mask
change depending on the new average power.
If the station power is Low and the average power is from 0.25 W to
2.50 W, the levels at both ends of the spectrum mask are calculated
using the following expression:

－(73.4 + 10 Log( [Average Power]))

If the station power is Low and the average power is 2.50 W, the lev-
els at both ends of the spectrum mask are −77.4 dB (the default).
If the station power is Low and the average power is 0.25 W, the lev-
els at both ends of the spectrum mask are −67.4 dB.

2-86
2.5 Spectrum Mask

If the average power is changed while mask Transmission is speci-

fied, the Equipment Standard is type B, and the station power is 30
dB Mask, the levels at both ends of the spectrum mask change de-
pending on the new average power
If the station power is 30 dB Mask and the average power is less
than 0.25 W and equal to or greater than 0.025 W, the levels at both
ends of the spectrum mask are calculated using the following ex-
pression:

(73.4 + 10 Log( [Average Power]))

If the station power is 30 dB Mask and the average power is 0.025 W,

the levels at both ends of the spectrum mask are −57.4 dB.

11. Occupied Frequency Bandwidth

This parameter measures the occupied frequency bandwidth for
spectrum waveforms, which includes 99 % of all power within the
measurement band.
12. Filter
This parameter modifies filter characteristics and loads a filter
characteristics file. Valid only if Equipment Standard is Brazil.
Select a filter characteristics file. Press the Filter Default key (F1)
after pressing the More soft key. The soft keys change to those for
selecting the filter.

Figure 2.5.1-15 Filter characteristics file selection

2-87
Chapter 2 Operations

[dB]

–27.4
–32.4
–38.4

–49.4
–52.0

–79.4

–15 –9 –3.15 –2.86 0.0 +2. 86 +3.15 +9 +15 [MHz]

–4.5 –3.00 -2.79 +2.79 +3.00 +4.5

Figure 2.5.1-16 Example of the Filter Characteristics Waveform Data

Default
Filter characteristics waveform data is created using the fixed filter.
The fixed filter contains filter data used to convert a waveform that
complies with the ISDB-T Standards, which do not use a filter, to a
waveform that complies with the Brazil Standards. If an ISDB-T
Standard compliant waveform is input, it is converted to a Brazil
Standard compliant waveform, and filter characteristics waveform
data attenuated by about 5 dB is created.

User-1，User-2，User-3
Any three filter characteristics files can be set up. These soft keys are
not displayed when the filter characteristics file is not loaded in the
MS8901A. Refer to Section 2.5.4 “Loading Filter Characteristics file”
for the method of loading the filter characteristics file.

13. Last Result

This parameter switches between showing and hiding the waveform
after filter correction.
Valid only when the Equipment Standard is Brazil. Refer to Section
2.5.5 “Switching Waveform Display” for details.
14. Uncorrection Result
This parameter switches between showing and hiding the waveform
without filter correction.
Valid only when the Equipment Standard is Brazil.
Refer to Section 2.5.5 “Switching Waveform Display” for details.

2-88
2.5 Spectrum Mask

15. Filter Data

This parameter switches between showing and hiding the waveform
for filter characteristics data.
Valid only when the Equipment Standard is Brazil.
Refer to Section 2.5.5 “Switching Waveform Display” for details.
16. Save Data to Mem Card
This parameter saves the spectrum waveform and the numerical
value data of the spectrum waveform to the memory card. Refer to
Section 2.12 “Saving Measurement Data” for details.
17. Back Screen
This parameter returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen
where measurement parameter is set.

When the RF/IF switching function is enabled, the measurement is

performed in accordance with the Channel Map mode of the meas-
urement target signal (RF/IF).

2-89
Chapter 2 Operations

2.5.2 Recalling spectrum mask line

Two types of arbitrary spectrum masks can be set. The following are out-
lines of the two settings procedures.

<Procedure>
(a) When using a memory card:

Create spectrum mask line data with

a Text Editor or Excel on a PC.

Wri te created data to a memory ca rd.

Insert the memory card to the

MS8901A then read the spect rum
mask line data.

(b) When using a remote control command:

Create spectrum mask line data with

a Text Editor or Excel on a PC.

Transfer the created data to the

MS8901A by a remote control
command.

(a1) and (b1). Create spectrum mask line data

Create spectrum mask line data using a Text Editor or Excel.
The spectrum mask line data structure is as shown below:
Spectrum mask title
Data count
Frequency 1, relative value 1
Frequency 2, relative value 2
Frequency 3, relative value 3
: :

2-90
2.5 Spectrum Mask

• The spectrum mask title can use up to ten alphanumeric char-

acters. The title is displayed in the soft key menu on the screen.
Commas (,) cannot be used in the title.
• Two to fifty data are available.
• Note that the frequency and the relative level differ, depending
on the Equipment Standard setting.
• When the Equipment Standard is type A
The frequency range: −10 to +10 MHz
The relative level range: 0.00 to –60.00 dB
• When the Equipment Standard is type B
The frequency range: −21 to +21 MHz
The relative level range: −27.40 to –90.00 dB
• When the Equipment Standard is Brazil
The frequency range: −15 to +15 MHz
The relative level range: −27.40 to –155.00 dB
• Align the frequency values in ascending order. If they are aligned
in the wrong order, an error may occur. It can be set up to two
decimal points in MHz unit.
• The relative level can be set up to two decimal points in dB unit.
• Make sure to set so that at least one top line exists in each spec-
trum mask line data. The top line is used for positioning with the
spectrum waveform. An error occurs in reading when two or
more top lines exist in the spectrum mask.
• Top line: 0.00 dB when the Equipment Standard is type A
−27.40 dB when the Equipment Standard is type B or
Brazil.
The following example show writing examples for the spectrum
mask line data using a using a Text Editor or Excel, each in case of
when the Equipment Standard is type A, B, and Brazil.

2-91
Chapter 2 Operations

[dB]
0

–30.5

–55.0

–10 –3.95 –2.85 +2.85 +3.95 +10

–3.1 +3.1 [MHz]

Figure 2.5.2-1 Example of spectrum mask (Equipment Standard: Type A)

MASK-1,
8,
-10.00，-55.00
-3.95，-55.00
-3.10，-30.50
-2.85，0.00
2.85，0.00
3.10，-30.50
3.95，-55.00
10.00，-55.00

Figure 2.5.2-2 Example of writing spectrum mask data with a Text

Editor

2-92
2.5 Spectrum Mask

A1 ▼ ＝
A B C
1 MASK-1
2 8
3 −10.00 −55.00
4 −3.95 −55.00
5 −3.10 −30.50
6 −2.85 0.00
7 2.85 0.00
8 3.10 −30.50
9 3.95 −55.00
10 10.00 −55.00
11
Figure 2.5.2-3 Example of writing spectrum mask data with Excel

[dB]

– 27.4

– 58.0

– 80.0

–15 –4.0 –3.0 +3.0 +4.0 +15

–3.2 +3.2 [MHz]
Figure 2.5.2-4 Example of spectrum mask (Equipment Standard: Type
B)

2-93
Chapter 2 Operations

MASK-1NEW,
8,
-15.00，-80.00
-4.00，-80.00
-3.20，-58.00
-3.00，-27.40
3.00，-27.40
3.20，-58.00
4.00，-80.00
15.00，-80.00

Figure 2.5.2-5 Example when the spectrum mask data is written with
the text editor (Equipment Standard: Type B)

A1 ▼ ＝
A B C
1 MASK-1NEW
2 8
3 −15.00 −80.00
4 −4.00 −80.00
5 −3.20 −58.00
6 −3.00 −27.40
7 3.00 −27.40
8 3.20 −58.00
9 4.00 −80.00
10 15.00 −80.00
11
Figure 2.5.2-6 Example when the spectrum mask data is written with
the text editor (Equipment Standard: Type B)

2-94
2.5 Spectrum Mask

[dB]
-27.4

–77.4

–124.4

–15 –4.0 –2.79 +3.0 +4.0 +15

–3.15 +3.15 [MHz]

Figure 2.5.2-7 Example of spectrum mask (Equipment Standard: Bra-

zil)

MASK-1BRA,
8,
-15.00, -124.4
-4.00, -124.4
-3.15, -77.4
-2.79, -27.4
2.79, -27.4
3.15, -77.4
4.00, -124.4
15.00, -124.4

Figure 2.5.2-8 Example when the spectrum mask data is written with
the text editor (Equipment Standard: Brazil)

2-95
Chapter 2 Operations

A1 ▼ ＝
A B C
1 MASK-1BRA
2 8
3 −15.00 −124.4
4 −4.00 −124.4
5 −3.15 −77.4
6 −2.79 −27.40
7 2.79 −27.40
8 3.15 −77.4
9 4.00 −124.4
10 15.00 −124.4
11
Figure 2.5.2-9 Example when the spectrum mask data is written with
the text editor (Equipment Standard: Brazil)

（a2） Write the data to a memory card (when using a memory card)
Save the data created using a text editor or Excel using one of the
following file names:
spmask1.csv or spmask2.csv
spmask1.csv is downloaded to User-1 and spmask2.csv to User-2 as
shown in Figure 2.5.1-2.
The first character string (“MASK-1”in Figure 2.5.2-2 “Example of
writing spectrum mask data with a text editor”) is displayed on the
function key.
Write the files to a memory card. Write these files to the root direc-
tory in the memory card.

2-96
2.5 Spectrum Mask

(a3) Load the spectrum mask data to the MS8901A (when using a mem-
ory card)
Insert the memory card in which the spectrum mask data
(spmask1.scv file) is written into the MS8901A. The memory card
can be inserted/removed while the power is supplied to the MS8901A.

Anritsu MS8901A

Memory

card

Figure 2.5.2-10 Insertion of memory card to the MS8901A

Press the Mask Transmission soft key (F1) on the first page of the
soft key menu on the Spectrum Mask screen, and then press the
Load Mask Data from Mem Card soft key (F5). The spectrum mask
data in the memory card is written to the MS8901A.

Figure 2.5.2-11 Loading spectrum mask data

2-97
Chapter 2 Operations

MASK-1 is displayed on the F2 function key after the spmask1.csv file is

loaded.

The range of the relative level and the frequency of the transmission
spectrum mask changes, depending on the setting of the Equipment
Standard. When loading, make sure of the type of the Equipment Stan-
dard and change the setting beforehand. Refer to (a1) or (b1), for details
on the range.

(b2) Transfer the spectrum mask line data to the MS8901A by a remote
control command (when using a remote control command)
Convert the data created using a Text Editor or Excel to the format
of the remote control command MASKFIT, and then transfer it to
the MS8901A. Refer to Section 3 “Remote Control” for detailed in-
formation on the MASKFIT command.
Figure 2.5.2-9 shows an example when transmitting the spectrum
mask line data created using a Text Editor to the MS8901A by a re-
mote control command.

MASK-1,
8,
-10.00， -55.00
-3.95，-55.00
-3.10，-30.50
-2.85，0.00
2.85，0.00
3.10，-30.50
3.95，-55.00
10.00，-55.00

MASKFIT 1, MASK-1,8,-10.00,-55.00,-3.95,-55.00,-3.10,-30.50,-2.85,0.00,2.85,0.00,3.10,-30.50,3.95,-55.00,10.00,-55.00

Figure 2.5.2-12 Conversion from spectrum mask line data created us-
ing a Text Editor to remote control command (Equipment Standard:
Type A)

2-98
2.5 Spectrum Mask

MASK-1NEW,
8,
-15.00，-80.00
-4.00，-80.00
-3.20，-58.00
-3.00，-27.40
3.00，-27.40
3.20，-58.50
4.00，-80.00
15.00，-80.00

MASKFIT 1, MASK-1NEW,8,-15,-80,-4,-80,-3.2,-58,-3,-27.4,3,-27.4,3.2,-58,4,-80,15,-80

Figure 2.5.2-13 Conversion from spectrum mask line data created using
a Text Editor to remote control command (Equipment Standard: Type B)

MASK-1BRA,
8,
-15.00, -124.4
-9.00, -124.4
-3.15, -77.4
-2.79, -27.4
2.79, -27.4
3.15, -77.4
9.00, -124.4
15.00, -124.4

MASKFIT 1, MASK-1BRA,8, -15, -124.4,-9.00, -124.4,-3.15, -77.4,-2.79,-27.4,2.79…

Figure 2.5.2-14 Conversion from spectrum mask line data created using
a Text Editor to remote control command (Equipment Standard: Brazil)

2-99
Chapter 2 Operations

2.5.3 Marker
Marker function can be used for reading levels and frequencies of the
spectrum wave.
The following three marker functions are provided:

(1) Normal marker:

This is displayed with a diamond shape on the screen. The level of
and the frequency at the marker position are displayed.
The levels within the frequency range that matches the spectrum
mask 0-dB line are averaged and aligned to 0 dB.
Frequency is displayed assuming the center frequency of the dis-
played band as 0 Hz.
(2) Delta marker:
The relative level and relative frequency for two points on the spec-
trum wave are displayed. Press the Delta Marker soft key when the
normal marker is displayed to switch the normal marker position to
the reference position, which is shown in the outlined diamond
shape. The relative level and relative frequency between the delta
marker and the reference position are displayed.
(3) Marker Trace:
This parameter switches the types of waveform that the marker
traces. This parameter can be specified only when the Equipment
Standard is Brazil. Refer to Section 2.5.6 “Marker Trace” for details.

Press the Marker key on the front panel to switch between normal/delta
markers, and marker trace. The soft key menu contents change to those
for marker type selection. Switch between the normal/delta markers and
marker trace with the soft key. The marker can be moved by turning the
Rotary Encoder.

2-100
2.5 Spectrum Mask

Marker

Normal
Marker
Marker
Delta
Marker

Maker
Trace

return

Figure 2.5.3-1 Marker type selection

2-101
Chapter 2 Operations

2.5.4 Loading Filter Characteristics File

Figure 2.5.4-2 Filter Data selection

Filtering can be used to correct the spectrum mask waveform.
During filtering, the filter characteristics file can be loaded to display the
spectrum waveform after attenuating the measurement data.

To specify the filter setting, press the More key on the Spectrum Mask
screen, and then select Filter Transmission (F1). The soft key menu
switches to the filter setting menu. One fixed filter (the default) and
three user-specified filters (User-1, User-2, and User-3) can be specified
in the filter characteristics by using the soft key. Filtering can be set up

2-102
2.5 Spectrum Mask

when the Equipment Standard is Brazil. Filtering cannot be set up when

the Equipment Standard is type A or type B.

＜Procedure＞

Create filter characteristics file data

using a text editor or Excel.

Write the data to a memory card.

Insert the memory card into the

MS8901A, and then load the filter
characteristics file data.

2-103
Chapter 2 Operations

(1) Creating the filter characteristics file

Create the filter characteristics file. Use a text editor or Excel. The
structure of the filter characteristics file is as follows.

The title of the filter characteristics file

The number of data items
The number of break points
Frequency 1, filter frequency
characteristics 1
Frequency 2, filter frequency
characteristics 2
Frequency 3, filter frequency
characteristics 3
：：

Figure 2.5.4-3 Characteristics File Structure

・ The filter characteristics file title can include up to ten alpha-
numeric characters. The title is displayed in the soft key menu
on the screen. Commas (,) cannot be used in the title.
・ 2 to 100 data items are available.
・ The setting range for the frequency is －15 to＋15 MHz, and the
setting range for the filter frequency characteristics is －0.00 to
－127.6 dB.
・ Sort the frequency values in ascending order. If they are sorted
in the wrong order, an error may occur
・ This parameter can include up to two digits following the deci-
mal point and is specified in MHz.
・ The filter frequency characteristics can include up to two digits
following the decimal point and are specified in dB.
・ The top line is 0.00 dB. Note that the setting value is multiplied
by －27.4 dB and displayed on the screen.

As a detailed example, filter characteristics file data created using a

text editor or Excel is shown below.

2-104
2.5 Spectrum Mask

using a text editor

A1 ▼ ＝
A B C
1 Filter-1
2 8
3 −15.00 −57.60
4 −4.00 −57.60
5 −3.50 −27.60
6 −3.00 0.00
7 3.00 0.00
8 3.50 −27.60
9 4.00 −57.60
10 15.00 −57.60
11
Figure 2.5.4-5 Example of writing filter characteristics file mask data
using Excel

(2) Write data to a memory card

Save the data created using a text editor or Excel using one of the
following file names:
Filter1.csv，Filter2.csv, or Filter3.csv
Filter1.csv is downloaded to User-1, Filter2.csv to User-2, and Fil-
ter3.csv to User-3 as shown in Figure 2.5.4-2.
The first character string (“Filter-1” in Figure 2.5.4-3 “Example of writing
filter characteristics file with a Text Editor”) is displayed on the
function key.
Write the files to a memory card. Write these files to the root direc-
tory in the memory card.
Example: When the memory card is set to Drive E: “E:\Filter1.csv”
Be sure to select the CSV format when writing with Excel.

(3) Load the filter characteristics file to the MS8901A.

Insert the memory card in which the filter characteristics file (Fil-
ter1.csv) is written into the MS8901A. The memory card can be in-
serted or removed while the MS8901A is on. Refer to the following
procedure for details about loading the filter characteristics file from
the memory card.

2-105
Chapter 2 Operations

Anritsu MS8 90 1A

Memory
Card

Figure 2.5.4-6 Insertion of memory card to the MS8901A

1. Insert the memory card into the MS8901A.
2. Press the More key on the Spectrum Mask screen to switch the
menu bar.
3. Press the Filter Default key (F1), and then open the Filter menu.
4. Pressing Load Filter Data from Mem Card (F5) loads the filter
characteristics file in the memory card automatically to the
MS8901A.

Figure 2.5.4-7 Recalling filter characteristics file

When the Filter1.csv file is loaded, the function menu of F2 (Filter-1)

key is output.

2-106
2.5 Spectrum Mask

Before loading the file, determine which standard corresponds to the

data and change the Equipment Standard setting. Refer to “(1) Cre-
ating the filter characteristics file” for details about the range.

2.5.5 Showing/hiding waveform

When the Equipment Standard is changed to Brazil, the waveform
data can be switched between being shown and hidden.
To switch whether the waveform is displayed, press the More key on
the Spectrum Mask screen, which changes the menu key contents.
Pressing the F2 to F4 keys can show or hide the waveform.
The F2 key can show and hide the spectrum waveform data (Last Re-
sult) after filter correction.
The F3 key can show and hide the spectrum waveform data before fil-
ter correction (Uncorrection Result).
The F4 key can show and hide the filter characteristics data (Filter
Data).
Note, however, that it is not possible to hide all the spectrum wave-
form data.

Pass-fail judgment is performed for the spectrum waveform after filter

correction (Last Result). The result of pass-fail judgment is displayed
even when the spectrum waveform after filter correction is hidden.
Each waveform data line is colored. The spectrum waveform data for
Last Result is yellow, that for Uncorrection Result is gray, and that for
Filter Data is green.
Last R es ul t
[dB] Spec tr um M ask Line
–2 0
–3 5
–5 0
–6 5
–8 0
–9 5
– 11 0
–12 5
–14 0
–15 5
– 15.0 0.0 +15.0 [M Hz ]

Table 2.5.5-1 Displayed waveform when Last Result is displayed, Un-

correction Result is hidden, and Filter Data is hidden

2-107
Chapter 2 Operations

[dB] U nc orrection R es ul t Sp ectrum Mas k Line

–20
–35
–50
–65
–80
–95
– 110
–125
–140
–155
– 15.0 0.0 +1 5.0 [MH z]

Table 2.5.5-2 Displayed waveform when Last Result is hidden, Un-

correction Result is displayed, and Filter Data is hidden

Filter Data Spec tr um M ask Line

[dB]

–20
–35
–50
–65
–80
–95
– 110
–125
–140
–155
– 15.0 0.0 + 15.0 [MH z]

Table 2.5.5-3 Displayed waveform when Last Result is hidden, Un-

correction Result is hidden, and Filter Data is displayed

2-108
2.5 Spectrum Mask

Filter D ata Spec tr um M ask L ine

[dB]
U nco rrection R esult Last R esul t
–20
–35
–50
–65
–80
–95
– 110
–125
–140
–155
– 15.0 0.0 +1 5.0 [MH z]

Table 2.5.5-4 Displayed waveform when Last Result, Uncorrection

Result, and Filter Data are displayed

2.5.6 Marker Trace

The waveform that displays the marker can be switched when the
Equipment Standard is Brazil. Refer to Section 2.5.3 "Marker" for how
to specify the marker.
When the Equipment Standard is type A or B, the spectrum mask is
not affected.
Press the Marker key on the front panel, and then select the Marker
Trace key (F3) in the Marker menu to open the selection screen.
Select which waveform the marker follows.
The marker can be set up only for a displayed waveform, as described
in Section 2.5.5 “Switching Display.”
(a) Last Result

The marker is set to the waveform data after filter correction.

(b) Uncorrection Result

The marker is set to the waveform data before filter correction.

The marker is set to the filter characteristics waveform data.

Margin is not displayed when Filter Data is selected.
The appropriate marker trace target is selected when the specified
waveform is shown or hidden after specifying a value for Marker
Trace.

2-109
Chapter 2 Operations

Table 2.5.6-1 Marker specification screen

2-110
2.6 Frequency Counter Measurement (Frequency Counter Screen)

2.6 Frequency Counter Measurement (Frequency

Counter Screen)
Frequency measurements for FFT sample clocks, etc., are performed.
This measurement differs from the MER and Constellation measurement
as it measures CW.

Note:
This measurement cannot be performed when System is TV auto
Select.

2.6.1 Frequency counter measurement

Press the Frequency Counter soft key on the Setup Common Parameter
screen. The screen switches to the Frequency Counter screen.

1 2

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Frequency

<< Frequency Counter (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Counter
Storage : Normal

Frequency : 8.126 984 13 MHz

Frequency Error : 0.13 Hz
0.0160 ppm *

Storage
Mode

Back
Frequency : 8.126984MHz Screen
Ref Level : -10dBm Pre Ampl : Off
1

Figure 2.6.1-1 Frequency Counter screen

1: Frequency measurement
Measures the CW frequency.
When the offset frequency is set, the measured result (CW fre-
quency) added with the set offset frequency is displayed.
The difference between the measured frequency and the set fre-
quency (frequency displayed at the bottom of the screen) is displayed
as a Frequency Error.

2-111
Chapter 2 Operations

Note:
When the FFT sample frequency theoretical value of 512/63 MHz =
8.126984127 … MHz is measured, the frequency error result be-
comes 0.13 Hz because the minimum resolution for frequency set-
tings is 1 Hz units. (Note that the 0.01 Hz digit may deviate ±0.01
Hz from the estimated limit).

Offset frequency additions are only the simple adding of setting

values. The correct value may not be shown when there are fre-
quency errors in the Local signal sources of the frequency con-
verter.

The detection levels drops and Under Range is displayed on the

screen if the frequency of the signal to be measured greatly devi-
ates from the set frequency.

When the frequency error exceeds ±15000 Hz, it falls outside the
measurement range and *** is displayed on the screen.

2: Storage Mode
Sets the methods for displaying the measured results on the screen.
Average, Max Hold, Over Write and other modes can be set. Refer to
Section 2.7 “Storage Mode” for details.
3: Back Screen
Returns to the Setup Common Parameter screen where measure-
ment parameters are set.

2-112
2.7 Storage Mode

2.7 Storage Mode

Each measured results are displayed as is for normal measurement.
When the input signal status has deteriorated or for long-term status
monitoring, however, it may be required to average the measured results
or to hold the measured result on the screen. Select the optimum storage
mode at this time.
The following five storage mode types are available.
• Normal
• Average
• Moving Avg
• Max Hold
• Over Write

These storage mode settings can be set for the Signal Analysis, C/N, and
Frequency Counter screens.
The storage mode settings cannot be performed on the Spectrum Mask
screen.

<Procedure>
1. Press the Storage Mode soft key (F2) on each measurement screen.
2. When the soft key menu changes, press the Mode soft key (F1).
3. A pop-up window for storage mode selection opens. Select a storage
mode from this window.

Modulation Storage Storage

Analysis Mode Mode

# # #
Normal
Trace Mode Average Mode
Format BMP File Moving Avg BMP File
* # Max Hold
Over Write
Storage Amount of
Mode Count

Refresh
Interval
Every Once

Recv. Seg.
13 Seg Mode
1 Seg Mode

Adjust
Range
*

Back return
Screen

123 1

Figure 2.7-1 Storage mode selection

2-113
Chapter 2 Operations

2.7.1 Normal
The measured results are displayed on the screen for each measurement.
Perform normal measurement in this mode.

2.7.2 Average
The results of measurement for specified numbers (times) are averaged
and displayed.

Note that the waveform display in the Constellation screen is updated

every five measurements. When the set average count is 6 or more,
therefore, the previous five measured results are always averaged and
updated. This updating operation is the same as that of moving average
described in Section 2.7.3 “Moving Avg.”

• Set average count (Amount of Count)

Set the average count in the following procedure:

<Procedure>
1. Press the Storage Mode soft key (F2) on each measurement screen.
2. When the soft key menu changes, press the Amount of Count soft
key (F2).
3. A pop-up window for setting the average count opens. Enter the av-
erage count in this window.
The average count can be set from 2 to 100.

Modulation Storage
Analysis Mode

# #

Trace Mode
Format BMP File
* # #
Entry[ 5] Amount of
Storage Amount of
Mode Count Count

Refresh
Interval
Every Once

Recv. Seg.
13 Seg Mode
1 Seg Mode

Adjust
Range
*

Back return
Screen

123 1

Figure 2.7.2-1 Setting average count (Amount of Count)

Note:
Measured results in dB units are converted to linear values before
averaging.

2-114
2.7 Storage Mode

• Set screen update method (Refresh Interval)

Set the display method for the screen during averaging operations.
The following two settings are possible:

Modulation Storage
Analysis Mode

# #

Trace Mode
Format BMP File
* #

Storage Amount of
Mode Count

Refresh
Interval
Every Once

Recv. Seg.
13 Seg Mode
1 Seg Mode

Adjust
Range
*

Back return
Screen

123 1

Figure 2.7.2-2 Setting screen update method (Refresh Interval)

(1) Every
This parameter displays the measured results during averaging
(averaging result for the current measurement count).
(2) Once
This parameter displays the measured results on the screen after
averaging is complete, without updating the waveform display dur-
ing averaging.

The measurement mode switches to the Single mode automatically when

the Storage Mode is set to Average.

The measurement operation stops when measurement of the number set

by the average count has been performed. In this event, “Measure: Sin-
gle” on the upper right of the screen becomes a blank space. Press the
Single key on the front panel to execute averaging again.

2-115
Chapter 2 Operations

2.7.3 Moving Avg

The results of measurement for specified number are averaged and dis-
played.

Moving Avg (moving average) differs from “Average” in Section 2.7.2

above in that only the results of measurement previously performed for
the specified numbers are averaged and displayed. The measurement
continues with Moving Avg even when the specified number of measure-
ment is finished, while averaging in Section 2.7.2 “Average” ends the
measurement.

Instantaneous
measured value [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Moving Avg [1] ([1]+[2]) ([1]+[2]+[3]) ([2]+[3]+[4]) ([3]+[4]+[5])

2 3 3 3

Average ([1]+[2]+ [3])

Set the measurement mode to Continuous for Moving Avg. When the
measurement mode is Single, the averaging operation is the same as that
in Average.

Moving Avg can only be set for the Modulation Analysis screen.

The waveform display in the Constellation screen is the same as that in

the Average mode.
The waveform display in the Freq Response and Sub-carrier MER screen
is the same as that in the Normal mode.

2-116
2.7 Storage Mode

2.7.4 Max Hold

The measured results and the currently displayed value are compared,
and the larger one is remained for display.

For MER, however, a smaller value is held since the larger MER values,
the poorer the performance. For Frequency Error, which may have both
positive and negative values, a larger absolute value is held.

The maximum value of each measurement point remains and is dis-

played in the waveform display on the Freq Response screen and C/N
screen. The waveform display in the Constellation screen is the same as
that in the Average mode.

The waveform display in the Sub-carrier MER screen is the same as that
in the Normal mode. A minimum value of MER is always held as the
waveform of the Worst Envelope line graph.

2.7.5 Over Write

Measured results are overwritten.
This function is available only for the waveform display in the Constella-
tion, Freq Response, SUB carrier MER and C/N screens.

For the numerical value display, the measured result is updated and dis-
played for each measurement in the same manner with the Normal
mode.

2-117
Chapter 2 Operations

2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

RF/IF switch function detects the levels of both the RF signal (set fre-
quency beforehand) and IF signal (37.15 MHz) at the beginning of meas-
urement to perform measurement for the signal whose level is higher.
The measurement target signal type (RF/IF) of this switch processing
and its status (Normal/No signal/Abnormal) are also output.

When measurements (modulation analysis (MER) measurement, CN

measurement and Spectrum Mask measurement) are complete and the
results are displayed, the target signal type and status of automatic
switch processing are output on the screen.

The RF/IF switch function is enabled when System is set to TV Auto Se-
lect.

When System is set to TV, the RF/IF switch function is disabled.

The explanation in this section assumes that System is set to TV Auto

Select.

2.8.1 Setting Measurement Parameters

Figure 2.8.1-1 Setup Common Parameter screen

(RF/IF switch function enabled)

The part enclosed in the dotted lines in the above figure shows the result
of RF/IF switch processing. Refer to Section 2.8.2 “System” for details.

2-118
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

2.8.2 System
This item enables/disables the RF/IF switch function.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >>

System : [TV Auto Select ]

Figure 2.8.2-1 System item

The difference between TV and TV Auto Select is shown below:

TV
Set to disable the RF/IF switch function. Select this to perform meas-
urement only for the RF signal or IF signal. Normally use this setting.

TV Auto Select
Set to enable the RF/IF switch function. Select this to perform measure-
ment by switching between RF and IF signals depending on the input
status. Use this setting when the RF and IF signals to be input to the
MX8901A are selected by using a switch.

2.8.3 Terminal
When TV Auto Select is set as System, the terminal is fixed to RF input
regardless of whether the MS8901A-18 (Low IF/IQ unbalanced input) op-
tion is installed or not.

2-119
Chapter 2 Operations

2.8.4 Frequencies and Channels

Set the frequency allocation (Channel Map) and carrier frequency (Fre-
quency) or channels (Channel) for the signals to be measured.

The Channel Map setting on the RF side is the same as that when the
RF/IF switch function is disabled (System = TV). The Channel Map set-
ting on the IF side is fixed to General.

Frequency
Channel Map : [Interim-1(1/7MHz Shift) ] (General)
Channel / Frequency : [ 13 CH] (37.15 MHz)
Offset Frequency : ( 0.00 MHz)
Spectrum : (Reverse)

Figure 2.8.4-1 Channel Map setting

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

The Carrier frequency (Frequency) or channels (Channel) setting on the

RF side is the same as that when the RF/IF switch function is disabled
(System = TV). The Carrier frequency setting on the IF side is fixed to
37.15 MHz.

Frequency
Channel Map : [Interim-1(1/7MHz Shift) ] (General)
Channel / Frequency : [ 13 CH] (37.15 MHz)
Offset Frequency : ( 0.00 MHz)
Spectrum : (Reverse)

Figure 2.8.4-2 Carrier frequency setting

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

2.8.5 Offset Frequency

Offset Frequency can be set when General or IF Band is selected for fre-
quency allocation (Channel Map).

The Offset Frequency setting on the RF side is the same as that when
the RF/IF switch function is disabled (System = TV).

The Offset Frequency setting on the IF side is fixed to 0.00 MHz.

Frequency
Channel Map : [Interim-1(1/7MHz Shift) ] (General)
Channel / Frequency : [ 13 CH] (37.15 MHz)
Offset Frequency : ( 0.00 MHz)
Spectrum : (Reverse)

Figure 2.8.5-1 Offset Frequency setting

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

2-120
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

2.8.6 Spectrum
The spectrum for IF signals at 37.15 MHz is reversed with respect to the
final RF frequency signals. In addition, the IF signal spectrum will still
be reversed when the LO signal frequency is set higher than the RF sig-
nal frequency even when the frequency is down-converted using an ex-
ternal frequency converter. Set Spectrum when analyzing a signal with
the spectrum reversed.

The Spectrum setting on the RF side is the same as that when the RF/IF
switch function is disabled (System = TV).

The Spectrum setting on the IF side is fixed to Reverse.

Frequency
Channel Map : [Interim-1(1/7MHz Shift) ] (General)
Channel / Frequency : [ 13 CH] (37.15 MHz)
Offset Frequency : ( 0.00 MHz)
Spectrum : (Reverse)

Figure 2.8.6-1 Spectrum reverse settings

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

2.8.7 Level
There are two methods for setting the input signal level. When the RF/IF
switch function is enabled (System = TV Auto Select), the setting method
of auto range adjustment (Adjust Range) is changed.

• Reference level setting (Ref Setting):

This sets the input level from the front panel. It is used when the sig-
nal level is known beforehand such as in a transmitter test.

• Auto range adjustment (Adjust Range):

Press the AGC key (F5) to set AGC On. Since the RF/IF switch func-
tion includes level adjustment processing, the auto range adjustment
function (Adjust Range) cannot be used when the RF/IF switch func-
tion is disabled (System = TV). The Level Cont key (F4) is therefore
also disabled.
This function detects the level of the measurement target signal at
each measurement and automatically switches the attenuator to per-
form measurement (the reference set value is ignored). However, this
function does not switch the pre-amplifier On/Off. Note that this func-
tion is executed normally when only one wave signal is input at a time.

2-121
Chapter 2 Operations

(1) Reference level setting (Ref Setting)

The signal level to be input is input from the screen as the reference
level.

Set value on the Set value on the

RF side IF side
Level
Reference : [-10 dBm] [-10 dBm]

Figure 2.8.7-1 Reference level settings

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

The reference level can also be set from the Amplitude key on the
front panel. Press the Amplitude key to change the soft key menu
contents; a pop-up window opens on the left of the Ref Level soft key
(F1). Set the reference level here.

Level setting on the

RF side

Level setting on the

IF side

Figure 2.8.7-2 Settings using Amplitude key

(when RF/IF switch function enabled)

2-122
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

(2) Auto range adjustment

AGC is initially set to Off. To change the input level setting method,
press the AGC key (F5) on the second page of the soft key menu. Off
and On are toggled when the AGC key is pressed. Note that Level
Cont is fixed to Ref Setting when TV Auto Select is set.

Level Cont (F4) key

is fixed to Ref Setting
when System is set
to TV Auto Select

Figure 2.8.7-3 Level Cont key (when RF/IF switch function enabled)

(3) Input level status display

The interface is the same as that when the RF/IF switch function is
disabled (System = TV). Refer to (3) in Section 2.2.6 “Level” for de-
tails.

2.8.8 Mode
Set the input signal mode (Mode). Mode settings on both the RF and IF
sides are the same as those when the RF/IF switch function is disabled
(System = TV). Refer to Section 2.2.7 “Mode” for details.

2.8.9 Guard Interval

Set the guard interval for the input signal (Guard Interval). Guard in-
terval settings on both the RF and IF sides are the same as those when
the RF/IF switch function is disabled (System = TV). Refer to Section
2.2.8 “Guard Interval” for details.

2.8.10 TMCC
Set the TMCC information of the input signal. TMCC settings on both
the RF and IF sides are the same as those when the RF/IF switch func-
tion is disabled (System = TV). Refer to Section 2.2.9 “TMCC” for details.

2-123
Chapter 2 Operations

2.8.11 Preamplifier
A pre-amplifier is built into the RF input portion as standard with the
MS8901A. Set the pre-amplifier to On when the input signal level is low
to enhance the MS8901A’s NF (Noise Figure) to enable low-level meas-
urements.
Press the Amplitude key on the front panel to change the soft key con-
tents. Then press the Preamplifier soft key (F5) to set the pre-amplifier
On/Off.

Amplitude key

Anritsu MS8901A

Amplitude

Ref Level

Ref Level
IF

Pre
Amplifier
On Off

Return

Figure 2.8.11-1 Pre-amplifier control

2-124
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

Note:
The maximum input level value (the upper level limit when the
MS8901A is not damaged) varies depending on pre-amplifier
On/Off.
Preamp Off: +30 dBm
Preamp On: +10 dBm

For example, there is a risk of damaging the MS8901A interior if

the pre-amplifier is set to On when +20 dBm is input with the
pre-amplifier Off. Note the input level when setting the
pre-amplifier On/Off while signals are input. The maximum input
level shown above will apply regardless of the Ref Level and Ref
Level IF settings.

2.8.12 Measurement mode

Measurement mode refers to how often the measured results should be
updated. There are two measurement modes provided: continuous mode
(Continuous) and single mode (Single). The measurement mode setting is
the same as that when the RF/IF switch function is disabled (System =
TV). Refer to Section 2.2.11 “Measurement mode” for details.

2.8.13 Initialization (Preset)

The initialization method and initial values are the same as those when
the RF/IF switch function is disabled (System = TV). Refer to Section
2.2.12 “Initialization (Preset)” for details.

2-125
Chapter 2 Operations

2.8.14 Measurement screens (Modulation Analysis, C/N, Spectrum

Mask)
The measured results are displayed on each measurement screen and the
Setup Common Parameter screen.

(Example) Modulation Analysis screen (Trace Format is set to No Trace)

Results are displayed on each measurement

screen and the Setup Common Parameter
screen.

Figure 2.8.14-1 Measured results display on Modulation Analysis screen

• Measured results display details (common to all screens)

Measurement Automatic switch RF/IF switching status
target signal processing status during measurement

Figure 2.8.14-2 RF/IF measured results display

Measurement target signal

Shows the type of the measurement target signal.
RF : Indicates that the RF signal is the measurement target.
IF : Indicates that the IF signal is the measurement target.
*** : Indicates that the measurement target is not determined.

2-126
2.8 RF/IF Switch Function

Automatic switch processing status

(No display) : Nothing is displayed when the input signal is normal.
No Measure : Not measured (from start to end of measurement)
Signal Loss : No input signal
Signal Abnormal : The number of attenuator switching exceeds the limit
when determining the measurement target. Measure-
ment is stopped after this is displayed.

Restarting measurement after stop

After measurement has stopped, it can be restarted by performing
a measurement start operation (for example, by pressing the Sin-
gle key). Refer to Section 2.9 “Measurement Stop when RF/IF
Switch Function Enabled” for details.

RF/IF switching status during measurement

Changed : Storage Mode (Average or Moving Avg) is selected, or the
measurement target (RF/IF) is switched during measure-
ment.
When storage mode is Moving Avg during modulation
analysis measurement, this display is cleared when meas-
urements are performed the number of times set by
Amount Of Count after the measurement target (RF/IF) is
switched.
* This is not displayed on the Spectrum Mask screen since
the Storage Mode function is not available.
(No display) : Nothing is displayed when the measurement target is not
switched.

2.8.15 Spectrum Mask measurement

Performs measurement with frequency allocation (Channel Map) mode
set for the measurement target (RF/IF). Refer to Section 2.5 “Spectrum
Mask” for details.

2.8.16 Saving measurement data

The method of saving measurement data when the RF/IF switch function
is enabled (System = TV Auto Select) is the same as that when the RF/IF
switch function is disabled (System = TV). Refer to Section 2.12 “Saving
Measurement Data” for details.

2-127
Chapter 2 Operations

2.9 Measurement Stop when RF/IF Switch Function

Enabled
Measurement may stop when the RF/IF switch function is enabled (Sys-
tem = TV Auto Select). This section describes the measurement stop con-
ditions, reasons, mechanism and countermeasures.

2.9.1 Measurement stop conditions

• While the RF/IF switch function is enabled, the input level is higher
than the reference setting (Over Range).
• While the RF/IF switch function is enabled, an OFDM signal is input
as the target signal for CN measurement (even when the input level is
the same as the reference setting).

Measurement may stop especially when setting the reference close to the
input level (where Over Range likely occur) to obtain the best MER
value.

2.9.2 Measurement stop criteria

When measurement stops, “Signal Abnormal” (RF/IF switch function
status) appears at the bottom of the screen. You can ascertain whether
the measurement is stopped by checking this status display.

Figure 2.9.2-1 RF/IF measured results display

2-128
2.9 Measurement Stop when RF/IF Switch Function Enabled

2.9.3 Measurement stop mechanism

When the RF/IF switch function is enabled, it measures the RF/IF levels
at each measurement.

When measuring the levels of both RF and IF, the MS8901A checks if the
internal AD converter is saturated to measure the levels accurately. If
the AD converter is saturated, the MS8901A switches its internal at-
tenuator to the one with the higher value. Then the MS8901A sets the
attenuator depending on reference setting again and performs measure-
ment.

It follows that when the input signal level is higher than that of the ref-
erence setting, attenuator switching occurs frequently. For CN meas-
urement, the hardware settings are performed assuming a CW (continu-
ous wave) signal as the input signal. If an OFDM signal is input acci-
dentally, the same phenomenon may therefore occur even if the input
signal level is equal to the set reference value.

Level control of the MS8901A is performed by a mechanical attenuator.

To keep the attenuators from being applied with excessive load when the
above phenomenon occurs frequently, the attenuator switch frequency is
monitored by software to stop measurement when the set threshold is
exceeded.

2.9.4 Restarting measurement after stop

After measurement has been stopped, it can be restarted by performing a
measurement start operation (by pressing the Single key or issuing a
remote command for measurement start).

2.9.5 Countermeasures to measurement stop

Prevent or handle measurement stop as shown below.

<Preventing measurement stop>

• Adjust the reference setting in advance.

<Handling measurement stop>

• Restart measurement. Refer to Section 2.9.4 “Restarting measurement
after stop” for details.
• Check the automatic switch processing status displayed on each
measurement screen to confirm the input signal status.

2-129
Chapter 2 Operations

2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

The signal parameter automatic detection function analyzes the input
signal to automatically set the mode, guard interval and TMCC informa-
tion (modulation system and number of segments for each layer) of the
input signal.

Automatic detection is executed on the signal analysis (Modulation

Analysis) screen. Then signal analysis (frequency, MER, constellation,
frequency response) is performed with the detected parameters.

Figure 2.10-1 Modulation Analysis screen (when third menu page

open)

2-130
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

2.10.1 Automatic detection operation

Execute automatic detection from the third page of the signal analysis
(Modulation Analysis) menu.

The following two levels are available for automatic signal parameter
detection.

• One for detecting mode, guard interval and TMCC information

(modulation system and number of segments for each layer)
• One for detecting TMCC information (modulation system and number
of segments for each layer)

Use the appropriate one of these two detection levels as follows:

• When the measurement environment varies significantly, such as in

field tests, perform automatic detection in “mode, guard interval and
TMCC information” mode at system startup and at the specified in-
terval. After that, perform automatic detection in “TMCC informa-
tion only” mode as necessary.
• In a measurement environment within a limited area, such as R&D or
production lines, the mode and guard interval will not vary so much.
Perform automatic detection in “TMCC information only” mode.

(1) Executing automatic detection

Follow the procedure shown below to execute automatic detection of
signal parameters.
<Procedure>
1. Set the measurement channel or frequency on the Setup Common
Parameter screen.
2. Set the reference level.
3. Move to signal analysis (Modulation Analysis).
4. Press the More key twice to display the third page of the menu.
5. Press the Auto. Det. from Seg (F3) key to select the measurement
target segment (segment No.: 0 to 12, initial value: 0).
6. Press the Signal Automatic Detection (F1) key. Automatic detection
of the signal parameters is executed.
After detection is complete, signal analysis measurement is performed
with the parameters detected automatically.

2-131
Chapter 2 Operations

Figure 2.10.1-1 Executing automatic detection of signal parameters

When performing automatic detection for TMCC information only, press

the TMCC Automatic Detection (F2) key in Step 3. above.

Figure 2.10.1-2 Executing automatic detection of TMCC

2-132
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

Note:
After automatic detection, the MS8901A checks whether or not the
detected Mode, Guard Interval, modulation system and segment
number for each layer are different from the current setting. If the
setting is different, the screen automatically shifts to the No Trace
screen, Code Rate for each layer and Time Interleave are not
checked.

(2) Operation during automatic detection

Executing automatic detection opens the message window shown
below. Operations except the Auto. Det. Cancel (F6) key and the
Preset key are disabled while this message is displayed.

Figure 2.10.1-3 Display during automatic detection of signal parame-

ters

Figure 2.10.1-4 Display during automatic detection of TMCC

Pressing the Auto. Det. Cancel (F6) key during detection stops automatic
detection and performs signal analysis with the current parameters.
Pressing the Preset key during detection stops automatic detection, ini-
tializes all parameters and returns to the Setup Common Parameter
screen.

(3) Display after automatic detection

One of the following four is returned as the detection status:
• Normal
• Detect bit error
• Detection Failed
• TMCC Illegal
Details of each status are shown below.

2-133
Chapter 2 Operations

Normal
The message window displayed after automatic detection varies depend-
ing on the automatic detection result. The messages displayed when the
detected parameters are the same as/different from those before detec-
tion after automatic detection has been completed normally are shown
below.

Figure 2.10.1-5 When the parameters are not changed

Figure 2.10.1-6 When the parameters are changed

Detect bit error

A parity bit is added to the bit string of the TMCC signal. The
MX890120B performs a parity check during automatic detection. When a
parity error is detected in the check, the messages shown below are dis-
played. In the same way as when detection was completed normally, the
messages displayed vary depending on whether the detected parameters
are the same as/different from those before detection as shown below.

Figure 2.10.1-7 When the parameters are not changed

Figure 2.10.1-8 When the parameters are changed

Note:
Even when an error is detected in the parity check, the detected
parameters are reflected in the settings.

2-134
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

Detection Failed
When automatic detection has failed, the message shown below is dis-
played.

Figure 2.10.1-9 When automatic detection failed

Possible causes of automatic detection failure are listed below:

• Input level is inappropriate (too high or too low against the set refer-
ence level)
• Frequency settings including frequency allocation (Channel Map),
frequency, channel and offset frequency are inappropriate for the in-
put signal.
• Spectrum reverse setting is inappropriate for the input signal (not de-
tected).

In addition, the signal quality may cause automatic detection failure as

shown below:
• Too noisy to detect TMCC
• TMCC information bit string contains reserved information (for exam-
ple, bit string of modulation system: 100 to 110).

TMCC Illegal
When the TMCC information is illegal, the message shown below is dis-
played.

Figure 2.10.1-10 When TMCC information is illegal

Possible causes of illegal TMCC information are listed below:

• TMCC Current information does not conform to “TMCC information”
in the “ARIB STD-B31” and “ABNT NBR 15601.”
(Example) When bits that cannot be assigned according to the stan-
dards, such as reserve (101 to 110), are set for the code rate
(B31 to B33) that is Layer A transmission parameter informa-
tion of the TMCC Current information.
Reference:
The detected TMCC information bit string (203 bits) can be
viewed via a remote command. For details, refer to Section
3.2 “Device Message.”

2-135
Chapter 2 Operations

2.10.2 Confirming detected parameters

The automatically detected parameters can be confirmed on all analysis
results screens of signal analysis (Modulation Analysis).

On the No Trace screen, detected parameters (mode, guard interval and

TMCC information) are displayed on the measured results screen.

Set parameters

Mode and
guard interval
information

Figure 2.10.2-1 Detected parameters display

Pressing the TMCC Information (F5) key on all analysis results screens
(No Trace, Constellation or Freq Response) opens the detection results
window.

Figure 2.10.2-2 Detection results window on the Constellation screen

2-136
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

The detection results window parameters are described below:

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5] [6] [7] [8]

Figure 2.10.2-3 Detection results window details

[1] Status
Displays the automatic detection results status. The display contents
are shown below:
Detection completed normally : “Normal”
Parity check error : “Detect bit error”
Detection failed : “Detection Failed”
Illegal TMCC : “TMCC Illegal”
[2] Mode
Displays the mode.
[3] Guard Interval
Displays the guard interval.
[4] Layer
Displays the layer.
[5] Segment
Displays the number of segments for each layer.
[6] Modulation
Displays the modulation system for each layer.
[7] Code Rate
Displays the coding ratio for each layer from the following five:
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
[8] Time Interleave
Displays the interleave length for each layer. This depends on the
mode.
Mode1: 0, 4, 8, 16
Mode2: 0, 2, 4, 8
Mode3: 0, 1, 2, 4

2-137
Chapter 2 Operations

However, information [4] thru [8] is shown as follows according to the

TMCC information settings.
Reserved : “***”
Layer not used : “---”

TMCC information can be displayed even when the automatic detection

result status is “Detection Failed” or “TMCC Illegal”. However, the detec-
tion results are not reflected on the measurement screens.

Pressing the TMCC Information(F5) key without performing automatic

detection causes the detection results window shown in Figure 2.10.2-4
to be displayed.

Figure 2.10.2-4 Detection results window (no detection performed)

2-138
2.10 Signal Parameter Automatic Detection Function

2.10.3 Specifying segment for automatic detection (Auto. Det. from Seg)
The segment used for automatic detection can be specified from all
analysis results screens of signal analysis (Modulation Analysis).

Specify the segment number by using the Auto. Det. from Seg (F3) soft
key. Perform this setting before executing automatic detection to perform
measurement with the segment specified.

Figure 2.10.3-1 Specifying automatic detection segment

on NoTrace screen

2-139
Chapter 2 Operations

2.10.4 Canceling automatic detection (Auto. Det. Cancel)

Automatic detection can be canceled from all analysis results screens of
signal analysis (Modulation Analysis).

While executing automatic detection, the window shown below is dis-

played. Key operations during detection are limited to pressing the Pre-
set key or Auto. Det. Cancel (F6) key. Pressing the Auto. Det. Cancel (F6)
soft key closes the window without changing parameters before detec-
tion.

Figure 2.10.4-1 Display during automatic detection of signal parame-

ters

Figure 2.10.4-2 Canceling automatic detection of signal parameters

2-140
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18)

2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18)

Low IF/IQ unbalanced input is an option function that can be used by in-
stalling the main unit option MS8901A-18. To use this function, the
MS8901A-18 and MX890120B are necessary.

By using this function, measurement at a low frequency band (250 kHz

to 5 MHz), called Low IF, and IQ analysis (unbalanced input) are enabled.
Use the IQ connectors on the front panel as the input pins.

To use this function, select Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC as
Terminal of Setup Common Parameter. Only modulation analysis can be
measured when Low IF or IQ is selected. C/N measurement, Spectrum
Mask measurement, and Frequency Counter measurement cannot be
performed.

Table 2.11-1 Measurement items for each Terminal

Low IF-DC IQ-DC

Terminal selection RF
Low IF-AC IQ-AC
Modulation Analysis 9 9 9
C/N 9* − −
Spectrum Mask 9* − −
Frequency Counter 9 − −
*: Enabled only when Channel Map is other than IF Band.

This function in invalid when System = TV Auto Select is set.

This section describes the case when Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or
IQ-AC is selected as Terminal.

2-141
Chapter 2 Operations

2.11.1 Setting measurement parameter

Settings of the measurement parameters required for this function are
described below.

The measurement parameters are set on the Setup Common Parameter

screen or the measurement screen. To display this screen, press the Sig-
nal Analysis key on the front panel or click the Back Screen key (F6) of
the soft keys in each measurement screen.

Figure 2.11.1-1 Setup Common Parameter screen

2.11.2 System
Set System = TV. This function cannot be used when System = TV Auto
Select.

MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56

<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >>

System : [TV ]

Figure 2.11.2-1 System display

2-142
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18)

2.11.3 Terminal & impedance

Select the Terminal from the following.
• Low IF-DC (I-Connector)
• Low IF-AC (I-Connector)
• IQ-DC
• IQ-AC

Use the I connector on the front panel to perform Low IF analysis (the Q
connector is not used). Use the I and Q connectors to perform IQ analy-
sis.

Either DC connection or AC connection is selectable for the measurement

signal. When using DC connection, select Low IF-DC or IQ-DC; when
using AC connection, select Low IF-AC or IQ-AC.

After Terminal above is selected, the impedance setting, 50 Ω or 1 MΩ, is

enabled.

Terminal & Impedance : [IQ-DC ] [50Ω]

Figure 2.11.3-1 Terminal & Impedance setting

Note:
When RF is selected as Terminal, impedance setting is not possi-
ble.

2.11.4 Channel/Frequency
When Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC is selected as Terminal,
the frequency allocation (Channel Map) of the signal to be measured is
not displayed. Set the carrier frequency (Frequency) of the signal to be
measured.

The setting range of the frequency is 250 kHz to 5 MHz (1 Hz resolution).

The initial value is 500 kHz.

Frequency

Channel / Frequency : [ 0.500 000 MHz]

Offset Frequency : [ 0.000 000 MHz]
Spectrum : [Normal]

Figure 2.11.4-1 Channel/Frequency setting

Signal Abnormal may be lit depending on the set frequency. It indicates

that measurement may not be correctly performed because the signal
loops at a 0 frequency.
2-143
Chapter 2 Operations

2.11.5 Offset Frequency

When Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC is selected as Terminal,
Offset Frequency can be set. This is the same as when General or IF
Band is selected in the frequency allocation setting (Channel Map). For
details, refer to Section 2.2.4 “Offset frequency.”

2.11.6 Spectrum
To input a signal whose spectrum is inverted, perform the spectrum in-
version setting. For the spectrum inversion, refer to Section 2.2.5 “Spec-
trum.”

Reference:
When measuring using IQ-DC or IQ-AC as Terminal, a negative
frequency can be represented. This software analyzes the signals
assuming that all the signals are positive frequency. A negative
frequency signal can be measured by inputting the I and Q input
signals to the Q and I input connectors respectively. Note with
caution, however, that the spectrum is inverted and the sign of the
frequency result is reversed.

Frequency

Channel / Frequency : [ 0.500 000MHz]

Offset Frequency : [ 0.000 000MHz]
Spectrum : [Normal]

Figure 2.11.6-1 Spectrum setting

2.11.7 Level
When Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC is selected as Terminal,
settings related to the level, the reference level setting (Ref Setting) and
automatic range adjustment (Adjust Range) cannot be performed.

This function can be measured without setting the level. However, input
the signal to the I and Q connectors on the front panel within the input
level range (0.1 to 1.0 Vpp).

2-144
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18)

2.11.8 Mode
Set the input signal mode. For details, refer to Section 2.2.7 “Mode.”

2.11.9 Guard Interval

Set the input signal guard interval. For details, refer to Section 2.2.8
“Guard Interval.”

2.11.10 TMCC
Set the TMCC information of the input signal. For details, refer to Sec-
tion 2.2.9 “TMCC.”

2.11.11 Preamplifier
When Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC is selected as Terminal,
the preamplifier cannot be set. The Amplitude key on the front panel is
disabled.

2.11.12 Measurement mode

Measurement mode refers to how often measured results should be up-
dated. There are two measurement modes provided: continuous mode
(Continuous) and single mode (Single). For details, refer to 2.2.11 “Meas-
urement mode.”

2.11.13 Initialization (Preset)

The initialization method and the initial value are the same as when RF
is selected as Terminal. For details, refer to Section 2.2.12 “Initialization
(Preset).”

2-145
Chapter 2 Operations

2.11.14 Setting list

Functions available for each Terminal and functions to which restrictions
are applied are listed below.

Table 2.11.14-1 List of Setup Common Parameter screen settings

Low IF-DC IQ-DC

RF
Low IF-AC IQ-AC
System TV 9 9 9
TV Auto 9 − −
Terminal RF 9 − −
Low IF-DC − 9 −
Low IF-AC − 9 −
IQ-DC − − 9
IQ-AC − − 9
Impedance − 9 9
Channel Map 9 − −
Channel/Frequency 9 9 9
Offset Frequency 9 9 9
Spectrum 9 9 9
Level Arbitrary − −
Signal 9 9 9
TMCC 9 9 9
AGC On/Off (function key) 9 − −
Preamplifier (function key) 9 − −
Amplitude key 9 − −

2-146
2.11 Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input (MS8901A-18)

2.11.15 Modulation Analysis

When Low IF-DC, Low IF-AC, IQ-DC, or IQ-AC is selected as Terminal,
the same functions as those of RF input are enabled. For details, refer to
Section 2.3 “Signal Analysis”. However, the functions shown in Table
2.11.14-1 cannot be used as an overall function.

Note:
Frequency setting when switching 1 Seg/13 Seg

When 13 Seg is selected by the 1 Seg/13 Seg switching function,

“Signal Abnormal” may appears flashing on the screen depending
on the set frequency. It indicates that measurement may not be
correctly performed because the signal loops at a 0 frequency. For
details of the partial reception signal, refer to Section 2.3.5 “Partial
reception signal analysis (Recv. Seg).”

2.11.16 Saving measurement data

The method of saving the measurement data is the same as when RF is
selected as Terminal. For details, refer to Section 2.12 “Saving Measure-
ment Data”.

2-147
Chapter 2 Operations

2.12 Saving Measurement Data

The MX890120B can save measured results to a memory card. The data
can be loaded to a PC for analysis at a later time.

The following two saving methods are available:

• Saves the screen image as a BMP file.
• Saves measured results to a file as numerical value data.

The memory card is used as the media for storing the files. The ATA and
compact flash cards are supported. Insert the memory card into the card
insertion slot on the front panel of the MS8901A.

Copy key

Anritsu MS8901A

Shift key

More key

Memory
Card

Figure 2.12-1 Memory card insertion

Note:
It takes several seconds for the MS8901A to identify the memory
card when it is inserted. Wait approximately 5 seconds before sav-
ing screens or numerical value data.

2-148
2.12 Saving Measurement Data

2.12.1 Saving screen

The contents displayed on the MS8901A LCD screen are saved as a BMP
file to the memory card.

Perform environmental settings for saving before saving the screen.

(1) Select save destination

Saving a screen can be performed simply by pressing the Copy key
on the front panel. Since the Copy key supports outputs to the
memory card and outputs to a printer, set the memory card as the
saving destination first.

<Procedure>
1. Press the Shift key on the front panel then the Copy key (the Shift
key lamp lights up when the Shift key is pressed).
2. The soft key menu changes to the menu for copy environmental set-
tings use.
3. Press the Copy to Printer/BMP File soft key (F1) and select BMP
File. This key performs toggle operations. Press it to switch between
the Printer and BMP File. The selected item is highlighted.

Figure 2.12.1-1 Copy environmental settings menu

2-149
Chapter 2 Operations

(2) Set screen color

The screen to be saved can be saved with a color screen as viewed.
It can also be saved with a monochrome screen.
Approximately 300 KB of memory capacity are needed for one color
screen and approximately 40 KB are needed for one monochrome
screen.

<Procedure>
1. Press the Shift key on the front panel then the Copy key (the Shift
key lamp lights up when the Shift key is pressed).
2. The soft key menu changes to the menu for copy environmental set-
tings use.
3. Press the BMP file set up soft key (F5). The soft key menu contents
change.
4. Select either Color (F1) or Monochrome (F2).

Figure 2.12.1-2 Saving screen color settings

2-150
2.12 Saving Measurement Data

(3) Save screen

The screen can be saved by pressing the Copy key on the front panel.
When the Copy key is pressed, the screen is saved to the memory
card in several seconds. The file name is displayed on the screen
when the saving has completed successfully.
MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Modulation
<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Analysis
Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024 #
Equalizer : Standard
Trace
Frequency Format
Carrier Frequency : 473.142 857 1 MHz *
Frequency Error : 0.0 Hz
0.0000 ppm Storage
Mode
MER
Conventional : 42.03 dB
>> Copy Complete !! << Seg Mod
Layer_A : 41.57 dB 1 DQP8K
File Name:COPY0001.BMP
Layer_B : 41.34 dB 11 64QAM
Layer_C : ----- dB 1 QPSK
Recv．Seg.
13 Seg Mode
TMCC : 44.07 dB
1 Seg Mode
AC1 : 43.98 dB
AC2 : ----- dB

Signal Adjust
Mode : Mode3 Range
Guard Interval : 1/8 →

Back
Screen
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 123

Figure 2.12.1-3 Screen at save completion

The file name format is “COPY****.BMP”. Numbers are assigned

automatically to the **** part, from 0000 to 9999. This number
cannot be set randomly.
The screen image is not copied if there are more than 10,000 COPY
data.
The file is saved to the directory in the memory card as follows:
“MS8901A\COPY\COPY****.BMP”

2-151
Chapter 2 Operations

2.12.2 Saving numerical value data

Measured results for constellations, frequency responses, etc. are saved
to the memory card as numerical value data.
The numerical values are saved in a CSV file format, where the numeri-
cal values are delimited by commas (,). Detailed analysis is enabled using
the tabulating calculation software on a PC such as Excel.

Note:
Numeric value data cannot be saved in the Frequency Counter
screen.

• Press the More key on the front panel at each measurement screen to
display the second page of the soft key menu.
• Press the Save Data to Mem Card soft key (F5).
• A pop-up window will open, asking whether to save. Move the Cursor
to Yes (reverse display) if saving, then press the Set key on the front
panel.
MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Modulation
<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Analysis
Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024 #
Equalizer : Standard

Frequency
Carrier Frequency : 473.142 857 1 MHz *
Frequency Error : 0.0 Hz
0.0000 ppm

MER
Conventional : 42.03 dB Equalizer
>> Save << Seg Mod Standard
Layer_A Yes41.57
: N No dB 1 DQP8K Advanced
Layer_B : 41.34 dB 11 64QAM
#
Layer_C : ----- dB 1 QPSK
Segmentation
TMCC : 44.07 dB
Offset
AC1 : 43.98 dB
AC2 : ----- dB #
Save Data
Signal To
Mode : Mode3 Mem Card
Guard Interval : 1/8 →

Back
Screen
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 123

Figure 2.12.2-1 Saving numerical value data

2-152
2.12 Saving Measurement Data

• The numerical value data is saved to the memory card in several sec-
onds to several tens of seconds. The file name is displayed on the
screen when the saving has completed successfully.
MS8901A 2000/04/01 12:34:56 Modulation
<< Setup Common Parameter (ISDB-T MER) >> Measure : Continuous Analysis
Storage : Normal
Seg Ofs : 1024 #
Equalizer : Standard

Frequency
Carrier Frequency : 473.142 857 1 MHz *
Frequency Error : 0.0 Hz
0.0000 ppm

MER
Conventional : 42.03 dB Equalizer
Seg Mod Standard
Layer_A : 41.57
Save Complete !! dB 1 DQP8K Advanced
Layer_B : 41.34 dB 11 64QAM
File Name: MOD0000.csv #
Layer_C : ----- dB 1 QPSK
Segmentation
TMCC : 44.07 dB
Offset
AC1 : 43.98 dB
AC2 : ----- dB #
Save Data
Signal To
Mode : Mode3 Mem Card
Guard Interval : 1/8 →

Back
Screen
Frequency : 473.142 857MHz Channel : 13CH
Pre Ampl : Off 123

Figure 2.12.2-2 End of numerical value data save

The file is saved with the name “###****.csv.” The ### parts express
the types of saving data as follows:
MOD: MER, constellation, or frequency responses data
CN: C/N data
MASK: Spectrum mask data
Note:
There is no saving data type provided for the Frequency Counter
screen because numeric value data cannot be saved in the Fre-
quency Counter screen.

Numbers are assigned automatically to the **** part, from 000 to 999.
Basically, this number cannot be set randomly, but can be specified by
remote control. Refer to Section 3 “Remote Control” for details.

No more data files can be saved if there are more than 1,000 result
data files.

The files are saved to the directory in the memory card as follows:
MS8901A\ISDBT20B\MOD\MOD****.csv
MS8901A\ISDBT20B\CN\CN****.csv
MS8901A\ISDBT20B\MASK\MASK****.csv
The file contents are classified into the common setting parameter and
the specific measured results data for each.

2-153
Chapter 2 Operations

• Common data (example)

DATE, 2000/04/01
TIME, 12:31:00
TITLE, Tokyo pilot
SYSTEM, TV
TERMINAL, RF
CHANNEL MAP, INTERIM-1
CHANNEL, 13
FREQUENCY, 473142857
FREQUENCY OFFSET, 0
REVERSE SPECTRUM, NRM
REFERENCE LEVEL, –20
PREAMP, OFF
MODE, 3
GUARD INTERVAL, 1PER8
LAYER A SEG, 3
LAYER A MOD, 64 QAM
LAYER B SEG, 5
LAYER B MOD, 16 QAM
LAYER C SEG, 5
LAYER C MOD, QPSK
LEVEL CONT, REF SETTING
STORAGE MODE, NORMAL
AMOUNT OF COUNT, 10

Notes:
1. CHANNEL is not displayed when CHANNEL MAP is set to
GENERAL.

2. FREQUENCY, FREQUENCY OFFSET and REVERSE SPEC-

TRUM are not displayed when CHANNEL MAP is set to IN-
TERIM-1, INTERIM-2, UHF, or UHF (Brazil).

3. REFERENCE LEVEL is not displayed when LEVEL CONT is

set to ADJUST RANGE.

4. Tabs have been inserted for easy understanding in the above

description; however, no tabs are inserted in the actual descrip-
tion.

2-154
2.12 Saving Measurement Data

• Specific data on No Trace screen (example)

REFER TO MER, OFF
EQUALIZER, STD
RECV.SEG, 13SEG
AUTO DET.SEGMENT, 0
SEGMENTATION OFFSET, 1024
CARRIER FREQUENCY, 473143527.12
FREQ ERROR (Hz), 2.32
FREQ ERROR (ppm), 0.031
MER (CONVENTIONAL), 38.21
MER (LAYER A), 38.21
MER (LAYER B), 37.81
MER (LAYER C), 37.23
MER (TMCC), 38.21
MER (AC1), 40.32
MER (AC2), 40.57

• Specific data on Constellation screen (example)

REFER TO MER, OFF
EQUALIZER, STD
RECV.SEG, 13SEG
AUTO DET.SEGMENT, 0
SEGMENTATION OFFSET, 1024
CARRIER FREQUENCY, 473143527.12
FREQ ERROR (Hz), 2.32
FREQ ERROR (ppm), 0.031
SECTION, LAYER_A
MER (CONVENTIONAL), 38.21
MER, 39.21
DATA COUNT, 2231
SYMBOLS, I, Q
0, 0.1546, 0.2533
1, 1.2547, –3.2214
: : :
: : :

• Specific data on frequency response screen (example)

REFER TO MER, OFF
EQUALIZER, STD
RECV.SEG, 13SEG
AUTO DET.SEGMENT, 0
SEGMENTATION OFFSET, 1024
CORRECTION, OFF
DATA COUNT, 2231
FREQ [Hz], AMPL [dB]
515150000, –2.32
515470000, –2.35
: :
: :
2-155
Chapter 2 Operations

• Specific data on sub-carrier MER screen (example)

REFER TO MER, OFF
EQUALIZER, STD
RECV.SEG, 13SEG
AUTO DET.SEGMENT, 0
SEGMENTATION OFFSET, 1024
MER (CONVENTIONAL), 45.0
THRESHOLD OFFSET, 20.0
MER VERTICAL SCALE, 50
WORST ENVELOPE, OFF
DATA COUNT, 5616
FREQ [Hz] MER [dB]
515150000, 45.550000
515470000, 44.990000
: :
: :

• Specific data on C/N screen (example)

CARRIER FREQUENCY, 473143527.12
FREQ ERROR (Hz), 2.32
FREQ ERROR (ppm), 0.031
DATA COUNT, 2231
INTEGRAL (dBc), –32.58
INTEGRAL RANGE (kHz), 23.05, 482.11
OFFSET FREQ [Hz], C/N [dBc/Hz], CW [dBc]
100, –51.3, –31.3
120, –51.9, –31.9
: : :
: : :

2-156
2.12 Saving Measurement Data

• Specific data on Spectrum Mask screen (example)

MASK NAME, TRANSMISSION
EQUIPMENT STANDARD, NEW
STATION POWER, HIGH
AVERAGE POWER, 1.25
NUMBER OF CHANNEL, 3
RESULT, PASS
DATA COUNT, 2231
OBW, 5.535
*

* When the Equipment Standard is not Brazil

FREQ [Hz], LEVEL［dB］, MASK [dB]
－15000000, －52.38, – 50.00
－14996000, －57.82, – 50.00
: : :
: : :

* When the Equipment Standard is Brazil.

FREQ［Hz］, LAST［dB］, MASK［dB］, UNCORRECTION[dB], FILTER[dB]
－15000000, －52.38, －50.00 －52.32 －30.48
－14996000, －57.82, －50.00 －57.82 －28.58
: : : : :
: : : : :

2-157
Chapter 2 Operations

Notes:
1. The following parameters have been added to the MX890120B,
compared with conventional products such as the MX890120A:
・ EQUALIZER
・ RECV. SEG
・ AUTO DET.SEGMENT
・ REFER TO MER
･ THRESHOLD OFFSET
･ MER VERTICAL SCALE
･ WORST ENVELOPE
･ EQUIPMENT STANDARD
･ STATION POWER
･ AVERAGE POWER
･ NUMBER OF CHANNEL
・ FILTER NAME
・ LAST RESULT
・ CORRECTION RESULT
・ FILTER DATA
・ TRACE MODE

2. When the Equipment Standard is type A, only commas (,) can

be specified for the STATION POWER parameter.
3. When the Equipment Standard is type A or Brazil, only commas
(,) can be specified as the values for AVERAGE POWER and
NUMBER OF CHANNEL.
4. When the Equipment Standard is type A or B, only commas (,)
can be specified for the FILTER NAME, LAST RESULT,
CORRECTION RESULT, FILTER DATA, and TRACE MODE
parameters.
5. The numeric data cannot be saved on the frequency counter
screen.

Tabs have been inserted for easy understanding in the above examples.
However, no tabs are inserted in the actual code.

2-158
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters (Save/Recall)

2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters

(Save/Recall)
The MS8901A can save and load (recall) the measurement parameter
settings to/from a memory card.
Insert a memory card into the MS8901A Memory Card insertion slot be-
fore saving and recalling. The memory card can be inserted/removed
while the power is supplied to the MS8901A.
Do not insert or remove the memory card while saving or recalling.

Note:
Incompatible with conventional products such as the MX890120A.

2.13.1 Saving measurement parameters (Save)

Press the Shift key then press the Save key on the front panel.

Save key Shift key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 2.13.1-1 Save key

2-159
Chapter 2 Operations

The soft key menu contents are changed for saving.

Figure 2.13.1-2 Save soft key

Up to one hundred setting conditions (files) can be saved to one memory

card. Files are saved in file numbers that range from 0 to 99. In addition,
alphabetic and numeric file names can be added as warranted and proc-
essed to write-protect.

Perform the following procedure to save a file by specifying a file number

directly without adding a file name.

<Procedure>
1. Press the File No. soft key (F3). A pop-up window opens.
2. Enter a file number. Another pop-up window opens for confirming
whether this input will be saved.
3. Confirm the file number then select “Yes.”

2-160
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters (Save/Recall)

Figure 2.13.1-3 Inputting file numbers directly and saving

Press the Display Dir. soft key (F2) when adding file names to files or
when write-protecting.

Figure 2.13.1-4 Save screen

2-161
Chapter 2 Operations

(1) Previous Page

The number of files that can be saved is one hundred (100) in total.
Eighteen files can be displayed per screen thus all one hundred are
displayed on six separate pages. Press the Previous Page soft (F1)
key to switch to the previous page.
(2) Display Dir./Next Page
Press the Display Dir./Next Page soft key (F2) to switch to the next
page.
(3) File No.
Perform the following procedure to save a file by specifying a file
number.

<Procedure>
1. Press the File No. soft key (F3). A pop-up window for entering a file
number opens.
2. Enter a file number and press the Set key on the front panel.
3. Reconfirm the file number entered, then move the cursor to Yes in
the >>Save<< confirmation pop-up window when confirmation is
complete, and press the Set key on the front panel to finish saving.

Save Save
Parameter Parameter

Previous Previous
Memory Card Information Page mation Page
Volume Label : :
Unused Area : 9 648 128 Bytes 9 648 128 Bytes
Total Area : 10 198 992 Bytes Display Dir. 10 198 992 Bytes
Display Dir.
Time Protect /Next Page Protect /Next Page

Entry[ 0] # Entry[ 5] #
Min 0 Max 99 File No. Min 0 Max 99 File No.

# >>Save<< #
File Name. Yes No File Name.

Write Write
Protect Protect

→ →
Back Back
Screen Screen

1 1

Figure 2.13.1-5 Saving by specifying file number

There are 100 file numbers that range from 0 to 99.

File names with “PARAM**” (** are file numbers) are added when saved
to new file numbers. In addition, contents that are saved are overwritten
when saved to file numbers where files already exist. File names stay as
they are in this event.

2-162
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters (Save/Recall)

(4) File Name

Perform the following procedure to save a file by adding a name.

<Procedure>
1. Move the cursor (highlighted) in the file number list to the number
of the file to be saved.
2. Press the File Name soft key (F4) to open a pop-up window for en-
tering a file name.
3. Enter the file name, and then press the Set key on the front panel.
4. Reconfirm the file name entered, then move the cursor to Yes in the
>>Save<< confirmation pop-up window when confirmation is com-
plete, and press the Set key on the front panel to finish saving.

Character inputs at pop-up window

Rotary Encoder: Moves the cursor located in the character list.

Step key: Moves the cursor located in the file name input win-
dow.

BS key: Deletes one character immediately before the cursor

located in the file name input window.

Enter key: Inserts the character on the cursor located in the

character list to immediately before the cursor in the
file name input window.

Save Save
Parameter Parameter

Previous Previous
Memory Card Information mation Page
Page
Volume Label : :
Unused Area : 9 648 128 Bytes 9 648 128 Bytes
Total Area : 10 198 992 Bytes 10 198 992 Bytes
Display Dir. Display Dir.
Time Protect /Next Page Protect /Next Page

# #
File No. File No.

File Name[Sample ] # File Name[Sample ] #

! #$%&01234 567 89@ (){}[ ] _-^~ ! #$%&01234 567 89@ (){}[ ] _-^~
File Name. File Name.
ABCDEF G HI JKLMNO PQ RST UVW XYZ ABCDEF G HI JKLMNO PQ RST UVW XYZ
abcdef ghi j kl nm opqrst uv wx yz abcdef ghi j kl nm opqrst uv wx yz

Write >>Save<< Write

Protect Protect
Yes No
→ →
Back Back
Screen Screen

1 1

Figure 2.13.1-6 Saving with file names

Up to eight characters can be input for file names.

2-163
Chapter 2 Operations

(5) Write Protect

Write-protects files.
Move the cursor in the file number list to the file to be protected.
Press the Write Protect soft key. The Protect column located at the
right edge of the file list will change from Off to On which will en-
able write-protect.

Figure 2.13.1-7 Write-protect

Move the cursor onto this file when releasing it from write-protect then
press the Write Protect soft key (F5).

2-164
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters (Save/Recall)

2.13.2 Recalling measurement parameters (Recall)

Insert a memory card into the Memory Card insertion slot.
Press the Recall key on the front panel.

Recall key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 2.13.2-1 Recall key

The soft key menu contents are changed for recalling.

Figure 2.13.2-2 Recall soft key

Up to one hundred setting conditions (saved files) can be saved to one

memory card.

2-165
Chapter 2 Operations

Perform the following procedure when the file number to be recalled is

known without having to check the file name.

<Procedure>
1. Press the File No. soft key (F3). A pop-up window opens.
2. Enter a file number. Another pop-up window opens for confirming
whether this input will be recalled.
3. Confirm the file number then select “Yes.”

Figure 2.13.2-3 Direct recall by specifying file number

Press the Display Dir. soft key (F2) to view the list of saved files.

Figure 2.13.2-4 Recall screen

2-166
2.13 Saving/Recalling Measurement Parameters (Save/Recall)

(1) Previous Page

The number of files that can be saved is one hundred in total.
Twenty-five files can be displayed per screen thus all one hundred
are displayed on four separate pages. Press the Previous Page soft
key (F1) to switch to the previous page.

(2) Display Dir./Next Page

Press the Display Dir./Next Page soft key (F2) to switch to the next
page.

(3) File No.

Perform the following procedure to recall a file by specifying a file
number.

<Procedure>
1. Press the File No. soft key (F3). A pop-up window for entering a file
number opens. Enter the file number to be recalled from the file list
on the screen.
2. Reconfirm the file number entered, then move the cursor to Yes in
the >>Recall<< confirmation pop-up window when confirmation is
complete, and press the Set key on the front panel to finish recalling.

2-167
Chapter 2 Operations

2.14 Screen Color Layout

The color for each part of the MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Soft-
ware screen can be changed to any color. Press the Shift key then the
Color key on the front panel to change the color layout. The soft key
menu changes for color layout selection.

Anritsu MS8901A

Shift key

Color key

Figure 2.14-1 Shift key and Color key

2.14.1 Fixed pattern color layout

The MS8901A has four fixed color layout patterns. Press the soft key for
each color layout. Note that the color layout from Color Pattern 1 to Color
Pattern 4 cannot be changed.

Figure 2.14.1-1 Fixed pattern soft key

2-168
2.14 Screen Color Layout

Color Pattern 1: Blue background color and yellow character color layout
Color Pattern 2: Green background color and white character color lay-
out
Color Pattern 3: Purple background color and yellow character layout
Color Pattern 4: Black background color, white character and waveform
color layout. Suitable for photography, others.

2-169
Chapter 2 Operations

2.14.2 User defined color layout

There is one pattern where the user can freely set the color layout.
Press the Define User Color soft key (F5).

Figure 2.14.2-1 User definition soft key

(1) Copy Color Ptn from

The fixed pattern color layout is copied to the user-defined color
layout. Press the Copy Color Ptn from soft key (F1) to change the
soft key menu to Color Pattern 1 through Color Pattern 4. Press a
soft key corresponding to the color layout pattern to be copied.

Figure 2.14.2-2 Soft key used to copy color layout from fixed pattern

2-170
2.14 Screen Color Layout

(2) Select Item

Press the Select Item soft key (F2) to select the part where the color
in the screen is changed. The name of the part where this color is
changed is displayed to the bottom of the Select Item soft key (F2).
It changes periodically when the Select Item soft key (F2) is pressed.

2-171
Chapter 2 Operations

Table 2.14.2-1 Color layout item number and location on screen

Screen
Item No. Setup Common Modulation Frequency
C/N Spectrum Mask
Parameter Analysis Counter
0:WaveBKgnd ------ Waveform display part background ------
1:Scale1 ------ Magnify ------
window
(Sub-carrier
MER)
2:Scale2 ------ Subsidiary scale line of graph ------
3:Scale3 ------ Frame outline of waveform dis- Frame outline of ------
play part waveform display part
Bar display indicating
measurement progress
4:Wave1 ------ Waveform ------
5:Wave2 ------ Waveform (for Over Write) ------
6:Wave3 ------ Waveform (for Over Write) ------
7:Wave4 ------ Waveform (for Over Write) ------
8:Wave5 ------ Waveform (for Over Write) Waveform(Last ------
Result)
9:Wave6 ------ Mask line ------
10:Wave7 ------ Worst Waveform ------
Envelope (Filter Data)
11:Wave8 ------ Sub-carrier ------
exceeding over
the threshold
12:Wave9 ------ Threshold line Waveform ------
(Uncorrection
Result)
13:WaveA ------ Delta marker ------
14:Text1 Character, numerical value
15:Text2 ------ Pass/Fail display ------
16:Text3 Status display on 2 lines at bottom of screen
17:Text4 ------ Level Over, Over Range, Level Under, Under Range, Carrier Unlocked,
Signal Abnormal
18:Text5 ------
19:Zone ------ Magnify window ------
(Freq
Response）
20:Marker ------ Marker point ------
21:FKeyBKGnd Soft key surface and background
22:FKHilite Soft key frame highlighted portion
23:FK Shadow Soft key frame dark portion
24:FKey Text Soft key character
25:FKey Text2 Inactive soft key highlighted character
26:FKey Text3 Inactive soft key dark character
27:Window BG Pop-up window background
28:WinShadow Pop-up window shadow
29:WindowTxt Pop-up window character
30: ------

2-172
2.14 Screen Color Layout

31: ------
32:BKground Screen background

2-173
Chapter 2 Operations

14 21

Figure 2.14.2-3 Setup Common Parameter screen color layout

14 21

16
Figure 2.14.2-4 No Trace screen color layout

2-174
2.14 Screen Color Layout

14 21

0 4, 5, 6
7, 8

Figure 2.14.2-5 Constellation screen color layout

19
14 21

32
17

4, 5, 6
7, 8
3

14
0

Figure 2.14.2-6 Freq Response screen color layout

2-175
Chapter 2 Operations

14 21

1 32
2

12
3

14
10

4，11
0
20

Figure 2.14.2-7 Sub-carrier MER color layout

17 18 21
14

4，5，6
7，8

16 32
Figure 2.14.2-8 C/N screen color layout

2-176
2.14 Screen Color Layout

21
17
14 20 15

2
9

4，5，6
7,8
3

16 32

Figure 2.14.2-9 Spectrum Mask screen color layout (Type A, Type B)

2-177
Chapter 2 Operations

21
17
14 20 15

0 10

12
2

8
3

16 32

Figure 2.14.2-10 Spectrum Mask screen color layout (Brazil)

2-178
2.14 Screen Color Layout

14
17 32

16
Figure 2.14.2-11 Frequency Counter screen color layout

2-179
Chapter 2 Operations

22 21 23 21 25，26

＃ 24 ＃

Frequency Frequency

23 22
Selected soft key Unselected soft key

Figure 2.14.2-12 Pop-up window color layout

27 Field
Strength
29
Entry[ 50 ] *
Min1 Max100 Sampling F1
Number

28
Figure 2.14.2-13 Soft key color layout

(3) Red: Green: Blue:

Set the color of the item selected with Select Item key. Color settings
are made by entering red, green and blue tones (primary colors) with
numerical values. Each color has 0 to 15 tones, thus a total of 4096
color tones can be set.
Typical tones and examples of color are shown in Table 2.14.2-2.

Table 2.14.2-2 Tone and color combinations

Red (F3) Green (F4) Blue (F5) Color
0 0 0 Black
0 0 15 Blue
0 15 0 Green
0 15 15 Light blue
15 0 0 Red
15 0 15 Purple
15 15 0 Yellow
15 15 15 White

2-180
2.15 Installing Measurement Software

2.15 Installing Measurement Software

This section describes the procedure for installing the software required
to use the MS8901A in the Signal Analysis mode.

<Procedure>
1. Insert the memory card containing the measurement software into
the slot.
2. Press the Config key to display the Config screen.
3. Press the System Install key (F4) to display the System Install
screen shown below.

Figure 2.15-1 System Install screen

4. Press the Change Installed System key (F2) to activate the Install
System box.
5. Select the installation destination of the new measurement system
by using the Rotary Encoder.
6. Press the Change Memory Card key (F3) to activate the Memory
Card box.
7. Select the new measurement system by using the Rotary Encoder.
8. Press the System Install key (F1) to install the new system.
9. A confirmation window opens. Move the cursor to [Yes] by using the
Rotary Encoder.
10. Press the Set key to start installation.

2-181
Section 2 Operations

2-182.
Chapter 3 Remote Control
This chapter describes how to remotely control the ISDB-T signal analy-
sis function of the MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer with the
MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software installed, via the GPIB
interface.

Refer to the MS8901A Operation Manual vol.3 for how to control the
spectrum analyzer function of the MS8901A.

3.1 Connection and Setting ............................................. 3-2

3.1.1 GPIB .............................................................. 3-2
3.1.2 RS-232C........................................................ 3-4
3.1.3 ETHERNET ................................................... 3-7
3.2 Device Messages ...................................................... 3-10
3.3 GPIB Sample Program .............................................. 3-39
3.3.1 Reading measurement parameters............... 3-40
3.3.2 Measuring MER............................................. 3-43
3.3.3 Measuring constellation................................. 3-53
3.3.4 C/N measurement ......................................... 3-56
3.3.5 Spectrum mask measurement ...................... 3-60
3.3.6 Sample program for common functions ........ 3-63
3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program ................................... 3-65
3.4.1 Measuring constellation................................. 3-65
3.5 RS-232C Sample Program ........................................ 3-71
3.5.1 Measuring constellation................................. 3-71

3-1
Section 3 Remote Control

3.1 Connection and Setting

The GPIB/RS232C/ETHERNET*1 is used for remote control of the
MS8901A.

This section describes the interface connection method and setting

method. For details of the connection method, refer to Section 2 “Connec-
tion Method” in the MS8901A Operation Manual Vol. 3.

*1: To use the ETHERNET interface, the MS8901A-09 ETHERNET in-

terface option is required.

3.1.1 GPIB
Connect and set GPIB using the following procedure.

<Procedure>
1. Connect the GPIB connector on the rear panel of the MS8901A to
the GPIB connector of the external controller using the GPIB cable.

MS8901A main unit rear panel

External controller (Example: PC)

GPIB

GPIB cable
Figure 3.1.1-1 GPIB connection configuration

2. Press the Config key on the front panel.

Config key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 3.1.1-2 Config key

3-2
3.1 Connection and Setting

3. After switching to the Configuration screen, click the Interface key

of the soft keys. Move the cursor to the Interface Connect to Con-
troller item shown in the top half of the screen and set GPIB.

Figure 3.1.1-3 Interface setting

4. Set the GPIB address.

Figure 3.1.1-4 GPIB address setting

Table 3.1.1-1 GPIB communication conditions

Setting item Set value

My address 0 to 30

3-3
Section 3 Remote Control

3.1.2 RS-232C
Connect and set the RS-232C using the following procedure.

<Procedure>
1. Connect the RS-232C connector (D-sub, 9-pin, male) on the rear
panel of the MS8901A to the RS-232C connector of the external con-
troller using the RS-232C cross cable.

MS8901A main unit rear panel

External controller (Example: PC)

RS232C

RS-232C cross cable

Figure 3.1.2-1 RS-232C connection configuration

MS8901A (Cross cable) PC

D-sub 9P female D-sub 9P female f

Figure 3.1.2-2 RS-232C cross cable connection

3-4
3.1 Connection and Setting

2. Press the Config key on the front panel.

Config key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 3.1.2-3 Config key

3. After switching to the Configuration screen, click the Interface key

of the soft keys. Move the cursor to the Interface Connect to Con-
troller item shown in the top half of the screen and set RS-232C.

Figure 3.1.2-4 Interface setting

4. Set the RS-232C communication conditions.

Figure 3.1.2-5 RS-232C communication condition setting

3-5
Section 3 Remote Control

Table 3.1.2-1 RS232C communication conditions

Setting item Set value

Baud Rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200 (bps)
Parity Even, Odd, Off (none)
Data Bit 7 bits, 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit, 2 bits
XON/XOFF Flow Control On

3-6
3.1 Connection and Setting

3.1.3 ETHERNET
Connect and set ETHERNET in the following procedure.

Note:
To use the ETHERNET interface, the MS8901A-09 ETHERNET
option is necessary.

<Procedure>
1. Connect the ETHERNET connector (RJ-45) on the rear panel of the
MS8901A to the ETHERNET connector of the external controller via
the HUB and using the ETHERNET straight cable. When using the
ETHERNET cross cable, directly connect the MS8901A to the ex-
ternal controller without HUB.

MS8901A main unit rear panel

External controller (Example: PC)

ETHERNET

HUB
ETHERNET ETHERNET
straight cable straight cable

Figure 3.1.3-1 ETHERNET connection example (using straight cable)

MS8901A main unit rear panel

External controller (Example: PC)

ETHERNET

ETHERNET
cross cable

Figure 3.1.3-2 ETHERNET connection example (using cross cable)

3-7
Section 3 Remote Control

2. Press the Config key on the front panel.

Config key

Anritsu MS8901A

Figure 3.1.3-3 Config key

3. After switching to the Configuration screen, click the Interface key

of the soft keys. Move the cursor to the Interface Connect to Con-
troller item shown in the top half of the screen and set ETHERNET.

Figure 3.1.3-4 Interface setting

4. Set the ETHERNET communication conditions.

Figure 3.1.3-5 ETHERNET communication condition setting

3-8
3.1 Connection and Setting

Table 3.1.3-1 ETHERNET communication conditions

Set items Set value Remark

My IP Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 IP address
Net Mask Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Net mask
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Gateway address
(when 0.0.0.0: No
gateway is set)
Host Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Communication part-
ner address
(when 0.0.0.0: Com-
munication partner is
not set)
Port Address 3000 to 30000 Port number for socket
communication

Note:
For the values required for the ETHERNET setting, contact the
administrator of your network.

5. Restart the MS8901A.

Note:
If the set value of ETHERNET is changed, it is valid only after re-
starting the MS8901A.

3-9
Section 3 Remote Control

3.2 Device Messages

Switching Screen Hierarchy
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
Spectrum
PNLMDΔSPECT PNLMD? SPECT
Analyzer
Measurement mode Note 3
Signal Analysis PNLMDΔSYSTEM PNLMD? SYSTEM
Configuration PNLMDΔCONFIG PNLMD? CONFIG
System1 SYS 1 SYS? 1
System
System2 SYS 2 SYS? 2 Note 3
selection (System)
System3 SYS 3 SYS? 3
Setup Common
DSPLΔSETCOM DSPL? SETCOM
Parameter
Modulation
DSPLΔMODANAL DSPL? MODANAL
Analyzer
C/N DSPLΔCN DSPL? CN Notes 1, 4, 5
Spectrum
DSPLΔMASK DSPL? MASK
Mask
Frequency
Screen DSPLΔFREQCNT DSPL? FREQCNT
Counter
transition
Back Screen BS --- --- Note 4
within signal
analysis mode Setup Common
MEASΔSETCOM MEAS? SETCOM
Parameter
Modulation
MEASΔMODANAL MEAS? MODANAL
Analyzer
C/N MEASΔCN MEAS? CN Notes 2, 4, 5
Spectrum
MEASΔMASK MEAS? MASK
Mask
Frequency
MEASΔFREQCNT MEAS? FREQCNT
Counter

Notes:
1. Screen transition only. Adjust_Range and measurement are not
performed.

2. Measurement is started after changing the screen, in the same

way as the key operation from the front panel.

3. Available in all measurement modes.

4. Available when the measurement mode is set to Signal Analy-

sis.

5. When other than RF is set as Terminal, C/N, Spectrum Mask,

and Frequency Counter cannot be measured.

*: Δ in the table above indicates a space.

3-10
3.2 Device Messages

Setup Common Parameters

The commands in the table below are enabled when the measurement mode is Signal Analysis. Detailed
information on each function is described in Section 2, “Operations.”

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
ISDBTSYSΔTV TV When System =
System setting TV Auto Select,
System ISDBTSYS?
(System) ISDBTSYSΔTVAUTO TVAUTO Terminal is fixed
to RF.
RF ISDBTTERMΔRF RF
ISDBTTERM
Low IF-DC LOWIFDC Note 6
ΔLOWIFDC
ISDBTTERM
Input connector Low IF-AC LOWIFAC Note 6
ΔLOWIFAC ISDBTTERM?
(Terminal)
ISDBTTERM
IQ-DC IQDC Note 6
ΔIQDC
ISDBTTERM
IQ-AC IQAC Note 6
ΔIQAC
TERMINZ
50 Ω 50
Impedance Δ50
TERMINZ? Note 6
(Impedance) TERMINZ
1 MΩ 1M
Δ1M
1/7-MHz shift
Frequency setting:
Interim-1 CHASSIGNΔINTERIM1 CHASSIGN? INTERIM1
13 to 32 channels
Note 7
0.15-MHz shift
Frequency setting:
Interim-2 CHASSIGNΔINTERIM2 CHASSIGN? INTERIM2
13 to 32 channels
Note 7
1/7-MHz shift
Frequency setting:
UHF CHASSIGNΔUHF CHASSIGN? UHF
13 to 62 channels
Frequency allocation
(Channel Map) Note 7
Frequency setting:
General CHASSIGNΔGENERAL CHASSIGN? GENERAL 32 to 3000 MHz
Note 7
Frequency setting:
IF Band CHASSIGNΔIFBAND CHASSIGN? IFBAND
3.9 to 38 MHz
Note 7
1/7 MHz shift
Frequency setting:
VHF CHASSIGNΔVHF CHASSIGN? VHF
1 to 12 channels
Note 7

3-11
Section 3 Remote Control

Setup Common Parameters (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
1/7 MHz shift
Frequency setting:
CATV CHASSIGNΔCATV CATV
13 to 63 channels
Frequency allocation
Note 7
(Channel Map) CHASSIGN?
(Cont’d) 1/7 MHz shift
CHASSIGNΔ UHF Frequency setting:
UHF_BRAZIL
UHF_BRAZIL _BRAAZIL 14 to 69 channels
Note 7
n: 1 to 69
Channel Channel CHANΔn CHAN? n (Unit: channel)
Note 7, Note 8
3.9 to 3000 MHz,
Frequency Frequency FREQΔf FREQ? f
Note 8
Frequency with
Frequency with offset --- OFFREQ? f Unit: Hz
Offset
Offset 0 to 12 GHz,
Offset Frequency FREQOFSΔf FRQOFS? f
Frequency Note 8
Frequency allocation
General --- CHASSIGNIF? GENERAL GENERAL (fixed)
(Channel Map IF)
Frequency (IF) Frequency IF --- FREQIF? f f: 37.15 MHz (fixed)
Frequency with Off- Frequency with
--- OFFREQIF? f f: 37.15 MHz (fixed)
set (IF) Offset IF
Offset Fre-
Offset Frequency (IF) --- FREQOFSIF? f f: 0 Hz (fixed)
quency IF
Normal RVSSPECTΔNRM RVSSPECT? NRM Can be set when
Channel Map =
Spectrum inversion
General or IFBand,
(Spectrum) Reverse RVSSPECTΔRVS RVSSPECT? RVS
or when Terminal
is other than RF.
Spectrum inversion
Reverse IF --- RVSSPECTIF? RVS RVS (fixed)
(Spectrum IF)
Reference Level Ref Level RFLVLΔ1 RFLVL? 1 Note 9
Note 9
Reference Level Can be set only
Ref level IF RFLVLIFΔ1 RFLVLIF? 1
(Reference Level.IF) when System is set
to TV Auto Select.
MODE1 TRNSMODEΔ1 TRNSMODE? 1
Mode
MODE2 TRNSMODEΔ2 TRNSMODE? 2
(Transmission Mode)
MODE3 TRNSMODEΔ3 TRNSMODE? 3
1/4 GINTERVΔ1PER4 GINTERV? 1PER4
1/8 GINTERVΔ1PER8 GINTERV? 1PER8
Guard interval
1/16 GINTERVΔ1PER16 GINTERV? 1PER16
1/32 GINTERVΔ1PER32 GINTERV? 1PER32

3-12
3.2 Device Messages

Setup Common Parameters (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
Segment SEGMENTΔn1,n2,n3 SEGMENT? n1,n2,n3 Note 10
Modulation System
SEGMODΔa1,a2,a3 SEGMOD? a1,a2,a3 Note 11
(Modulation)
Ref Setting LVLCTRLΔREF LVLCTRL? REF
“ADJ” cannot be
set when System is
set to TV Auto Se-
Level control method lect or Channel
(Level Control) Adjust Range LVLCTRLΔADJ LVLCTRL? ADJ Map is IFBand.

Note 7

Cannot be set when

Auto range adjust- On REFMERΔON REFMER? ON System is set to TV
ment by the modula- Auto Select or
tion error ratio (Refer Channel Map is
to MER) Off REFMERΔOFF REFMER? OFF IFBand.
Note 7
On PREAMPΔON PREAMP? ON Note 7
Preamplifier
Off PREAMPΔOFF PREAMP? OFF Note 7
On AGCΔON ON Can be set only
AGC AGC? when System is set
Off AGCΔOFF OFF
to TV Auto Select.
***
Measurement target Fixed to RF when
Target --- TARGET? RF
signal System is set to TV.
IF
NOMEAS
Fixed to NOMEAS
Measurement target NORM
Target Status --- TGETSTAT? when System is set
signal status SIGLOSS to TV.
ABNORM
NOCHANGED Fixed to NO-
Measurement target
Target Change --- TGETCHANGE? CHANGED when
signal change CHANGED
System is set to TV.
GINTERV
1/4 GINTERV? 1PER4
△1PER4
Guard Interval
GINTERV
1/8 GINTERV? 1PER8
△1PER8
Ref level recon- On REFMER ON REFMER? ON
figuration
Off REFMER OFF REFMER? OFF
(Refer to MER)

3-13
Section 3 Remote Control

Notes:
6. Setting Terminal = other than RF is possible only when the
MS8901A-18 (Low IF/IQ unbalanced input) option is installed.
If the setting is performed without this option installed, the
message “Valid only when Low IF Option is enable” is displayed.

7. This command can be set only when Terminal = RF with the

MS8901A-18 installed.
8. Hz applies when the unit is omitted. The following units can be
used:
HZ (Hz), KHZ (kHz), MHZ (MHz), GHZ (GHz)
Only Channel can be set when Channel Map is Interim-1, In-
terim-2 ,VHF, UHF, CATV, and UHF (Brazil). Frequency can be
set when Channel Map is IF Band or General.

The settable channel range varies depending on the Channel

Map setting.

Type of Channel Map and n: The channel range is as follows.

Channel Map n:Channel range

VHF 1 to 12
UHF 13 to 62
CATV 13 to 63
Interim-1 13 to 32
Interim-2 13 to 32
UHF (Brazil) 14 to 69

When the MS8901A-18 is installed, this command can be set if

Terminal is other than RF.

9. dBm applies when the unit is omitted. Only DBM (dBm) is

available as the unit in this event.
When pre-amplifier is Off: −26 to 10 dBm
When pre-amplifier is On: −46 to −10 dBm

10. n1 = Number of segments for Layer_A

n2 = Number of segments for Layer_B
n3 = Number of segments for Layer_C
n1 + n2 + n3 = 13

11. a1 = Modulation system for Layer_A

a2 = Modulation system for Layer_B
a3 = Modulation system for Layer_C

3-14
3.2 Device Messages

Select one of the following modulation systems:

PR64QAM (64QAM modulation for partial reception)
PR16QAM (16QAM modulation for partial reception)
PRQPSK (QPSK modulation for partial reception)
PRDQPSK (DQPSK modulation for partial reception)
(Cannot be set when Trace Format = Freq Response.)
64QAM (64QAM modulation)
16QAM (16QAM modulation)
QPSK (QPSK modulation)
DQPSK (DQPSK modulation)
(Cannot be set when Trace Format = Freq Response.)

3-15
Section 3 Remote Control

Modulation Analysis
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
No Trace TRFORMΔNON TRFORM? NON
Measurement screen Constellation TRFORMΔCONSTEL TRFORM? CONSTEL
selection Freq Response TRFORMΔFRESP TRFORM? FRESP Note 11
(Trace Format) Sub-carrier
TRFORMΔSUBCARR TRFORM? SUBCARR
MER
Receive of ALL
RECVSEGΔ13SEG RECVSEG? 13SEG
Partial reception Seg. (13)
(Receive of Receive of 1 Note 12
Segments) Seg (Mobile RECVSEGΔ1SEG RECVSEG? 1SEG
Profile)
Normal STRG_MODΔNRM STRG_MOD? NRM
Average STRG_MODΔAVG STRG_MOD? AVG
Storage mode Moving Avg STRG_MODΔMVAVG STRG_MOD? MVAVG
Max Hold STRG_MODΔMAX STRG_MOD? MAX
Over write STRG_MODΔOVER STRG_MOD? OVER
Averaging count
CNT_MODΔn CNT_MOD? n n: 2 to 100
(Amount of Count)
Every INTVAL_MODΔEVERY INTVAL_MOD? EVERY
Refresh interval
Once INTVAL_MODΔONCE INTVAL_MOD? ONCE
Layer_A MODSECΔLAYERA MODSEC? LAYERA
Layer_B MODSECΔLAYERB MODSEC? LAYERB
Constellation section Layer_C MODSECΔLAYERC MODSEC? LAYERC
(Section) TMCC MODSECΔTMCC MODSEC? TMCC
AC1 MODSECΔAC1 MODSEC? AC1
AC2 MODSECΔAC2 MODSEC? AC2
Advanced EQZΔADV EQZ? ADV
Multipath Equalizer
Standard EQZΔSTD EQZ? STD
Refer to Table
2.3.5-1 in Section
Segmentation offset SEGOFSΔn SEGOFS? n
2.3.5 “Segmenta-
tion Offset.”
Disabled when
ISDBTSystem is
Automatic range
TVAUTO, or
adjustment ADJRNG --- ---
Channel Map is
(Adjust Range)
IFBand.
Note 7
On BNDCORRΔON BNDCORR? ON
Correction
Off BNDCORRΔOFF BNDCORR? OFF
Frequency response
correction BNDCAL --- ---
(Calibration)

3-16
3.2 Device Messages

Modulation Analysis (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
±2 dB VSCALE_AMPΔ2 VSCALE_AMP? 2
Vertical scale of ±5 dB VSCALE_AMPΔ5 VSCALE_AMP? 5
frequency response ±10 dB VSCALE_AMPΔ10 VSCALE_AMP? 10
(Vertical Scale) ±20 dB VSCALE_AMPΔ20 VSCALE_AMP? 20
±50 dB VSCALE_AMPΔ50 VSCALE_AMP? 50

20 dB VSCALE_MERΔ20 VSCALE_MER? 20

30 dB VSCALE_MERΔ30 VSCALE_MER? 30
Vertical scale of
sub-carrier MER 40 dB VSCALE_MERΔ40 VSCALE_MER? 40
(Vertical Scale)
50 dB VSCALE_MERΔ50 VSCALE_MER? 50

60 dB VSCALE_MERΔ60 VSCALE_MER? 60

MER threshold offset

(MER Threshold MERTHRΔl MERTHR? l l:0.00 to 30.00
Offset)
Display or Display WSTENVΔON WSTENV? ON
non-display of worst
envelope line
(WORST ENVE- Non-display WSTENVΔOFF WSTENV? OFF
LOPE)
Automatic signal de-
tection (Signal SIGAUTODET --- --- Notes 16, 19
Automatic Detection)
TMCC signal detec-
tion (TMCC Auto- TMCCAUTODET --- --- Notes 16, 19
matic Detection)
Cancellation of auto-
matic detection DETCANCEL --- --- Note 19
(Detection Cancel)
Automatic detection
status --- DETSTAT? n See Note 17 for n.
(Detection Status)
Bit string --- TMCCINFO? s See Note 18 for s.
TMCCINFO?
Mode --- a Note 21
ΔTRNSMODE
TMCCINFO?
Guard Interval --- b Note 21
TMCC information ΔGINTERV
bit TMCCINFO?
Segment --- c1, c2, c3 Note 21
(TMCC Information) ΔSEGMENT
TMCCINFO?
Modulation --- d1, d2, d3 Note 21
ΔSEGMOD
TMCCINFO?
Coding ratio --- e1, e2, e3 Note 21
ΔSEGCR

3-17
Section 3 Remote Control

Modulation Analysis (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
TMCC information
bit Interleave TMCCINFO?
--- f1, f2, f3
(TMCC Information) length ΔSEGINTLEV
(Cont’d)
Specification of seg-
ment for automatic n: Segment
AUTODETSEGΔn AUTODETSEG? n
detection (Auto. Det. number, 0 to 12
from Seg)
s: Number of
symbols
Note 20
Marker position on
MKP_MODΔs MKP_MOD? s Can be set when
constellation
the measurement
screen is Con-
stellation
I and Q at marker I --- MKL_MOD?ΔI i
position on constella- Q --- MKL_MOD?ΔQ q
tion I and Q --- MKL_MOD? i,q
n: Number of
segments, 0 to 12
Magnify window po-
Can be set when
sition for frequency FRESPZONEΔn FRESPZONE? n
the measure-
response
ment screen is
Freq Response
p: Number of
horizontal
points, 0 to 431
Marker position for
MKP_FREΔp MKP_FRE? p Can be set when
frequency response
the measure-
ment screen is
Freq Response
Marker value for
--- MKL_FRE?ΔAMP a Unit: dB
frequency response
Normal data MKMODEΔCURR MKMODE? CURR
Marker trace status Worst envelope
MKMODEΔWORST MKMODE? WORST Note: 22
line
Can be set when
the measure-
Magnify window po-
ment screen is
sition of sub-carrier SUBCARRZONEΔn SUBCARRZONE? n
sub-carrier MER
MER
n: Segment
number 0 to 12

3-18
3.2 Device Messages

Modulation Analysis (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.

Can be set when

the measure-
ment screen is
Marker position of sub-carrier MER
MKP_SUBCARRΔp MKP_SUBCARR? p
sub-carrier MER
p: Number of
horizontal points
Note 23
Marker value of
--- MKL_SUBCARR? l Unit: dB
sub-carrier MER
Whole wave-
PKS_SUBCARRΔON, 13 PKS_SUBCARR? ON, 13
form
Magnify wave-
Peak search setting PKS_SUBCARRΔON, 1 PKS_SUBCARR? ON, 1 Note 24
form
Peak search
PKS_SUBCARRΔOFF PKS_SUBCARR? OFF
Off
Frequency value of
--- PKF_SUBCARR? f Unit: Hz
the peak position
Level value of the
--- PKL_SUBCARR? l Unit: dB
peak position
Unit: Hz
CARRF? f (One decimal
point)
Carrier frequency --- Unit: Hz
(Two decimal
CARRFHR? f
points)
Note 26
Unit: Hz
CARRFERR? f (One decimal
point)
--- Unit: Hz
(Two decimal
CARRFERRHR? f
points)
Note 26
Unit: Hz
Carrier frequency
CARRFERR?ΔHZ f (One decimal
error
point)
--- Unit: Hz
CARRFERRHR?Δ (Two decimal
f
HZ points)
Note 26
Unit: ppm, 5
CARRFERR?
--- f digits of integer
ΔPPM
part displayed

3-19
Section 3 Remote Control

Modulation Analysis (cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.

Unit: ppm, 6
CARRFERRHV? digits of integer
f
ΔPPM part displayed
Carrier frequency
Note 27
error
Unit: ppm, 6
(Cont’d)
CARRFERRHR?Δ digits of integer
f
PPM part displayed
Note 26, 27
All --- MER?ΔALL a,b,c,d,e,f,g
Conventional --- MER?ΔCONV a
Layer_A --- MER?ΔLAYERA b
MER measured re- Layer_B --- MER?ΔLAYERB c
Note 13
sult Layer_C --- MER?ΔLAYERC d
TMCC --- MER?ΔTMCC e
AC1 --- MER?ΔAC1 f
AC2 --- MER?ΔAC2 g
*** Fixed to RF
Measurement target
--- TARGET? RF when System is
signal (Target)
IF set to TV.
NOMEAS Fixed to
Measurement target
NORM NOMEAS when
signal status --- TGETSTAT?
SIGLOSS System is set to
(Target Status)
ABNORM TV.

Fixed to NO-
Measurement target NOCHANGED
CHANGED
change --- TGETCHANGE?
when System is
(Target Change) CHANGED
set to TV.
Constellation data
--- XMC?Δt,a,b,d k,k, ... Note 14, 49
readout
Frequency response
--- XMAMP?Δb,d k,k, ... Note 15, 49
data readout
Sub-carrier MER XMSUBCARR?
--- k,k, ... Note 25, 49
data readout Δb,d
Worst envelope line
XMWSTENV?
of sub-carrier MER --- k,k, ... Note 25, 49
Δb,d
data readout
Automatic
number as- MODSV --- ---
Saving data to mem-
signment
ory card
Specified
MODSVΔn --- --- n: 0 to 999
number

3-20
3.2 Device Messages

Notes:
12. “RECVSEG 1SEG” is valid only when Layer-A Mod is set to
partial reception (PR)

13. Argument types:

a: Conventional
b: Layer_A
c: Layer_B
d: Layer_C
e: TMCC
f: AC1
g: AC2
Resolution: 0.01 (in dB units)
“***” (three asterisks) will be returned when a measured
value is not displayed.

14. t = Section type

LAYERA (Layer_A)
LAYERB (Layer_B)
LAYERC (Layer_C) TMCC (TMCC)
AC1 (AC1)
AC2 (AC2)
a = Data type
0 (I) or
1 (Q)
b = First symbol point where data readout starts
d = Number of symbols

Refer to the maximum symbol number of Note 20. The maxi-

mum symbol number is the upper limit of the data to be read-
out. For example: At Mode3, AC1 symbol data is 416 by the fol-
lowing formula.

416 = {(8 carriers) × (segment number for each layer: 13) × 4}

When reading out all the data of I component, the formula

comes to be “XMC?ΔAC1,0,1,416”. And when it is Q component,
the formula comes to be “XMC?ΔAC1,1,1,416”.

15. b = First frequency axis point where data readout starts

(0 to 5617)
d = Number of points

3-21
Section 3 Remote Control

16. Remote control messages act as follows during automatic detec-

tion.
• When DETCANCEL is received, automatic detection is
stopped.
• When DETSTAT? is received, the value shown in Note 17
corresponding to the automatic detection status is returned.
• When *RST is received, detection is stopped and initializa-
tion is performed.
• When a query command for a parameter is received, the set
value for the parameter is returned as the response.
• When a query command for measured results on the Modu-
lation Analysis screen is received, “***” is returned.
• When a query command for measured results on other than
the Modulation Analysis screen is received, the previous
measured result (or “***” if measurement is not performed)
is returned.
• Other messages are ignored.
• As a result of the automatic detection (Adjust Range is in-
cluded when Refer to MER is On), the selection of the meas-
ured screen (Trace Format) is automatically switched to No
Trace, after Mode, Guard Interval, modulation system and
segment number for each layer are modified.

17. 0: Completed normally

2: Detection failed
3: Parity check error
4: Invalid TMCC
9: Not detected or under detection

18. The TMCC bit string (203 bits excluding differential reference)
is converted to a hexadecimal number and returned as a char-
acter string (51 characters).
The output format is shown below.

B1-B11 B12-B27 B28-B43 ------ B172-B187 B188-B203

7FF FFFF FFFF ------ FFFF FFFF

When TMCCINFO? is received when detection is not performed

or is under execution, the response becomes “***” (three aster-
isks).

19. Can be executed only on a measurement screen.

3-22
3.2 Device Messages

20. The number of symbols varies depending on the mode or modu-

lation system.
Synchronized segment (when modulation system is not DQPSK
or DQPSK(PR))

Mode Data carrier AC1 TMCC

Mode1 96 2 1
Mode2 192 4 2
Mode3 384 8 4

Differential segment (when modulation system is DQPSK or

DQPSK(PR))

Mode Data carrier AC1 AC2 TMCC

Mode1 96 2 4 5
Mode2 192 4 9 10
Mode3 384 8 19 20

The maximum number of symbols for data carrier is:

(Number of carriers) × (Number of segments in the layer) ×4

The maximum number of symbols for other cases is:

{(Number of carriers in synchronized segment) × (Number of
synchronized segments)
+ (Number of carriers in differential segment) × (Number of
differential segments)} × 4

Note that the sum of the number of synchronized segments and

the number of differential segments is 13.

3-23
Section 3 Remote Control

21. The response message is a value obtained by TMCC automatic

detection.
a: Mode
b: Guard Interval
c1: Segment in Layer A
c2: Segment in Layer B
c3: Segment in Layer C
d1: Modulation in Layer A
d2: Modulation in Layer B
d3: Modulation in Layer C
e1: Coding ratio in Layer A
e2: Coding ratio in Layer B
e3: Coding ratio in Layer C

Range of coding ratio: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8

f1: Interleave length in Layer A
f2: Interleave length in Layer B
f3: Interleave length in Layer C

Range of interleave length (selectable value varies depending on

mode):

Mode1 Mode2 Mode3

0, 4, 8, 16 0, 2, 4, 8 0, 1, 2, 4

The following response messages can be returned depending on the

layer status:
Layer not used: “---”
Reserved: “***”

22. “MKMODEΔWORST” is valid only when Worst Envelope is On.

23. Horizontal point number at marker shift depends on Mode on

the sub-carrier MER screen.

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

0 to 107 0 to 215 0 to 431

24. When Receive of Segments is 1 Segment, “PKS_SUBCARRΔON,

13” is invalid.

3-24
3.2 Device Messages

25. b = First frequency axis point to readout the data. (0 to 5617 at

max)

d = point number

Refer to the point number at the horizontal axis of Note 23.

The upper threshold is the data, in which the number of hori-
zontal points is multiplied by 13 and 1 is added.

For example: At Mode3, all the data number of sub-carrier MER

is equal to 5617, which is gained by the following formula:

{(432 point) × (segment number of layer:13) + 1}

When reading out all the data of the normal sub-carrier

MER ,issue the command of “XMSUBCARR?Δ0,5617”.

26. This command is valid only when the MS8901A-53 or

MS8901A-73 (upgrading of the modulation frequency measure-
ment accuracy) option is installed. When reading out without
the option installed, the message of “Valid only when
Mod.Freq.Measurement Ext-Option is enable” is displayed.

27.The difference between “CARRFERRHV?ΔPPM” and

“CARRFERRHR?ΔPPM” is as follows.

(a) “…HV?” uses the measured result of the 0.1 Hz resolution

frequency error to convert the frequency error into ppm
unit.

(b) “…HR?” is valid only when the MS8901A-53 or MS8901A-73

(upgrading of the modulation frequency measurement ac-
curacy) option is installed. The measured result of the 0.01
Hz resolution frequency error is used to convert the fre-
quency error into ppm unit. Example of when frequency er-
ror is 0.04 Hz.

In case of (a), the frequency error is treated as the 0.1 Hz reso-

lution here and the error is rounded to 0.0 Hz. The value con-
verted into the ppm unit, is to be + 0.0000 ppm.

In case of (b), the frequency error is 0.04 Hz to be treated and

the value converted into ppm unit is to be output.

49. Response is in binary format when binary format is specified as

format of response data by the BIN command.

3-25
Section 3 Remote Control

Refer to the response message format in Chapter 3 “Device

Message Format” in the MS8901A Operation Manual Vol.3.

3-26
3.2 Device Messages

C/N (Note 5)
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
STRG_CN
Normal STRG_CN? NRM
ΔNRM
Average STRG_CNΔAVG STRG_CN? AVG
Storage mode
Max Hold STRG_CNΔMAX STRG_CN? MAX
STRG_CN
Over write STRG_CN? OVER
ΔOVER
Averaging count
CNT_CNΔn CNT_CN? n n: 2 to 100
(Amount of Count)
INTVAL_CN
Every INTVAL_CN? EVERY
ΔEVERY
Refresh interval
INTVAL_CN
Once INTVAL_CN? ONCE
ΔONCE
Automatic range Disabled when
adjustment ADJRNG --- --- ISDBTSystem is
(Adjust Range) TVAUTO
n and m indicate
frequency (kHz)
Resolution: 0.001,
Integral value meas-
n< m
urement range INTG_RNGΔn,m INTG_RNG? n,m
n: 0.100 to 999.999
(Integral Range)
kHz
m: 0.101 to
100000.000 kHz
Integral value meas- On INTGΔON INTG? ON
urement function
Off INTGΔOFF INTG? OFF
(Integral Setting)
p: Number of hori-
Marker position MKP_CNΔp MKP_CN? p zontal points,
0 to 483
C/N value at marker
--- MKL_CN? l Unit: dBc/Hz
position
Unit: dBc/Hz
f: Offset frequency
C/N value at specified
--- MKL_CN?Δf l
offset frequency * Relative fre-
quency from the
marker position
CW value at marker
--- MKLCW? l Unit: dBc
position
Unit: dBc
f: Offset frequency
CW value at specified
--- MKLCW?Δf l * Relative fre-
offset frequency
quency from the
marker position
Carrier frequency --- CARRF_CN? f 0.1-Hz resolution

3-27
Section 3 Remote Control

C/N (Note 5)
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
--- CARRFERR_CN? f 0.1-Hz resolution
CARRFERR_CN?
Carrier frequency --- f 0.1-Hz resolution
ΔHZ
error
CARRFERR_CN?
--- p Unit: ppm
ΔPPM
High-resolution carrier
frequency 0.01-Hz resolution
--- CARRFHR_CN? f
(Carrier Frequency Note 28
High Resolution)
0.01-Hz resolution
--- CARRFERRHR_CN? f
High-resolution carrier Note 28
frequency error CARRFERRHR_CN? 0.01-Hz resolution
--- f
(Carrier Frequency ΔHZ Note 28
Error High Resolution)
CARRFERRHR_CN?
--- p Unit: ppm
ΔPPM
Integration results
--- INTGRSLT? l Unit: dBc
(Integral Result)
*** Fixed to RF when
Measurement target
Target --- TARGET? RF System is set to
signal
IF TV.
NOMEAS
Fixed to NOMEAS
Measurement target NORM
Target Status --- TGETSTAT? when System is set
signal status SIGLOSS to TV.
ABNORM
Fixed to NO-
NOCHANGED
Measurement target CHANGED when
Target Change --- TGETCHANGE?
change System is set to
CHANGED
TV.
Specified point --- XMCN?Δp,d l,l, ... Note 29, 49
C/N data readout Specified fre- --- XMCNF_HZ?Δp,d f,l, ... Note 30, 49
quency --- XMCNF?Δp,d f,l, ... Note 31, 49
Automatic
number assign- CNSV --- ---
Saving data to mem-
ment
ory card
Number as-
CNSVΔn --- --- n: 0 to 999
signment

3-28
3.2 Device Messages

Notes:
28. Performs measurement with one-tenth calculation resolution of
that for existing command.

29. p = Starting point of data readout on the horizontal axis

(0 to 483)
d = Number of data
l = Level

30. p = Starting frequency of data readout on the horizontal axis

(unit: Hz)
d = Number of data
l = Level (unit: dBc/Hz)
f = Frequency (unit: Hz)

31. p = Starting frequency of data readout on the horizontal axis

(in Hz units)
d = Number of data
l = Level (unit: dBc/Hz)
f = Frequency (unit: 10 Hz)

3-29
Section 3 Remote Control

Spectrum Mask (Note 5)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.

Status of Mask Complete --- MASK_STS? 0

Check Now Execute MASK_STS? 1
Pass --- MASK_CHECK? PASS
Judgment results
Fail --- MASK_CHECK? FAIL
Occupied frequency
--- OBW? f Unit: Hz
bandwidth
Transmission SPMASKΔTRANS SPMASK? TRANS
Mask selection User-1 SPMASKΔUSER1 SPMASK? USER1
User-2 SPMASKΔUSER2 SPMASK? USER2
Mask data load (from
SPMASKLD --- ---
memory card)
Mask data read/write MASKFITΔn,s,c,f(1),l(1), s,c,f(1),l(1),
MASKFIT?Δn Note 32
(using command) ...f(c),l(c) ...f(c),l(c)
Normal MKR_MASKΔNRM MKR_MASK? NRM
Marker mode
Delta MKR_MASKΔDELTA MKR_MASK? DELTA
Type A SPMASK_STDΔTYPEA SPMASK_STD? TYPEA
Equipment Standard Type B SPMASK_STDΔTYPEB SPMASK_STD? TYPEB
Brazil SPMASK_BRAZIL SPMASK_STD? BRAZIL
High STTNTYPΔHIGH STTNTYP? HIGH Note 33
Station Power Low STTNTYPΔLOW STTNTYP? LOW Note 33
(Type B) STTNTYP 30DB_
30dB Mask STTNTYP? Note 33
Δ30DB_MASK MASK
Critical STTNTYPΔCRTICAL STTNTYP? CRITICAL Note 34
STTNTYP SUB
Station Power Sub-Critical STTNTYP? Note 34
ΔSUBCRITICAL CRITICAL
(Brazil)
STTNTYP NON
Non-Critical STTNTYP? Note 34
ΔNONCRITICAL CRITICAL
w: Transmitter
When the station
power is Low
output power
(unit: w) 0.25 to
2.50v
When the station
Average Power power is 30dB
STTNPOWΔw STTNPOW? w
Mask
Output Power
(unit: w) 0.025 to
0.249
Cannot be set
when the station
power is High
Note 33, 35

3-30
3.2 Device Messages

Number of channel to
measure n: 1 to 3
NUMCHΔn NUMCH? n
(Number of Channel) Note 33,36

p: Number of
Marker position MKP_MASKΔp MKP_MASK? p horizontal points,
0 to 5000
Level --- MKL_MASK? l Unit: dB
Unit: dB
f: Relative fre-
Spectrum waveform quency (Unit:
at marker position Frequency --- MKL_MASK?Δf l Hz)
Marker position
is not related
Note 36
Margin at marker MKMRGN_MA
--- l Unit: dB
position SK?

3-31
Section 3 Remote Control

Spectrum Mask (Cont’d)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
Automatic range ad-
justment Disabled when
ADJRNG --- --- ISDBTSystem is
(Adjust Range)
TVAUTO

*** Fixed to RF
Measurement target
Target --- TARGET? RF when System is
signal
IF set to TV.
NOMEAS Fixed to
Measurement target NORM NOMEAS when
Target Status --- TGETSTAT?
signal status SIGLOSS System is set to
ABNORM TV.

Fixed to NO-
NOCHANGED
Measurement target CHANGED when
Target Change --- TGETCHANGE?
change System is set to
CHANGED
TV.

--- XMM? Δp，d l，l，････ Note 37, 38, 49

--- XMM_LAST? Note 37, 39, 49

Δp,d Waveform data
l，l，････
after Filter cor-
rection
Specified point --- XMM_UNCORR? Note 37, 39, 49
Δ p,d Waveform data
l，l，････
before Filter cor-
rection
--- XMM_FILTER? Note 37, 39, 49
Δp,d l，l，････ Filter characteris-
Spectrum waveform tics data
data readout ---
XMMF?Δp,d f,l, ... Note 38, 40, 49

--- XMMF_LAST? Note 39, 40, 49

Δp,d Waveform data
f，l，････
after Filter cor-
rection
Specified
frequency
--- XMMF_ Note 39, 40, 49
UNCORR?Δp,d Waveform data
f，l，････
before Filter cor-
rection
--- XMMF_ Note 39, 40, 49
FILTER?Δp,d f，l，････ Filter characteris-
tics data
Automatic
number MASKSV --- ---
Saving data to
assignment
memory card
Specified
MASKSVΔn --- --- n: 0 to 999
number

3-32
3.2 Device Messages

Default MASKFILTER△ MASKFILTER? DEFAULT

Note 34
Filter characteris- DEFAULT
tics file selection User-1 MASKFILTER△USER1 MASKFILTER? USER1 Note 34
User-2 MASKFILTER△USER2 MASKFILTER? USER2 Note 34
User-3 MASKFILTER△USER3 MASKFILTER? USER3 Note 34
Loading Filter Data MASK --- ---
Note 34
File FILTERLD
Displaying/Not Dis- On LASTRSLT LASTRSLT? ON
Note 34,41
playing the spectrum △ON
waveform after cor- Off LASTRSLT △OFF LASTRSLT? OFF
Note 34,41
rection (Last Result)
Displaying/Not Dis- On UNCORRRSLT△ON UNCORRRSLT? ON Note 34,41
playing the spectrum Off UNCORRRSLT△OFF UNCORRRSLT? OFF
waveform before cor-
rection (Uncoｒｒection Note 34,41
Result)

Displaying/Not Dis- On FILTERDATA△ON FILTERDATA? ON Note 34,41

playing filter charac- Off FILTERDATA △OFF FILTERDATA? OFF
teristics waveform Note 34,41
(Filter Data)
Selecting where to Last Result MKTRACE_MASK△ MKTRACE_MAS LAST
Note 34,42
trace the marker LAST K?
（Marker Trace） Uncorrection MKTRACE_MASK△ MKTRACE_MAS UNCORR
Result UNCORR K? Note 34,42

Filter Data MKTRACE_MASK△ MKTRACE_MAS FILTER

Note 34,42
FILTER K?

3-33
Section 3 Remote Control

Notes:
32. The mask table data can be registered by using a remote pro-
gramming command. Use a remote query command to read out
the mask table contents.
The remote program command format is shown below.
MASKFIT n,s,c,f(1),l(1), ... ,f(c),l(c)
n: 1 (User-1) or 2 (User-2)
*0 (Transmission) cannot be specified.
s: Mask title (up to 10 characters)
c: Number of break points (2 to 50)
f(1-c): Frequency (MHz) at each break point. Specify as many
as the number of break points (c).
l(1-c): Relative level (dB) at each break point. Specify as many
as the number of break points (c).
When specifying the top line for the relative level, it is assumed
that there is only one horizontal line.

Horizontal line level: 0.0 dB when Equipment Standard is Type A

−27.4 dB when Equipment Standard is Type B

The format for a remote query command and its response mes-
sage are shown below.
MASKFIT? n <Query>
s,c,f(1),l(1), ... ,f(c),l(c) <Response>
n: 0 (Transmission), 1 (User-1) or 2 (User-2)
s: Mask title. “TRNS” is output when n=0.
c: Number of break points
f(1-c): Frequency (MHz) at each break point. Specify as many
as the number of break points (c).
l(1-c): Relative level (dB) at each break point. Specify as many
as the number of break points (c).
When the currently selected mask table is changed, Pass/Fail
judgment is performed again.
The valid range to set the frequency and relative level changes,
depending on the Equipment Standard.
Type A: Frequency range ± 10 MHz, relative level 0.0 dB to −60
dB
Type B: Frequency range ± 21 MHz, relative level –27.4 dB to
−90.0 dB
Brazil: Frequency range ± 15 MHz, relative level –27.4 dB to
−155.0 dB
33. Valid only when Equipment Standard is Type B. This parame-
ter cannot be set when Equipment Standard is Type A or Brazil.
But only Query is valid.
3-34
3.2 Device Messages

34.Valid only when Equipment Standard is Brazil. This parameter

cannot be set when Equipment Standard is Type A or Type B.
But only Query is valid.
35.When Station Power is Low or 30dB Mask. This parameter
cannot be set when Station Power is High. But only Query is
valid.
36. When Equipment Standard is Type A, the frequency range to
measure is ± 10 MHz. When Equipment Standard is Type B
and the channel number to measure is 1, the frequency range
to measure is ± 15 MHz. Hereafter, every time 1 channel in-
creases, the frequency range is enlarged by ＋6 MHz at Type B.
When Equipment Standard is Brazil, the frequency range to
measure is ± 15 MHz.
37. p = Starting point of data readout on the horizontal axis (0 to
5000)
d = Number of data
l = Level
38.Valid when Equipment Standard is Type A or Type B. Query is
invalid when the Equipment Standard is Brazil.
39.Valid only when Equipment Standard is Brazil. Query is invalid
when the Equipment Standard is Type A or Type B.
40. p = Starting frequency of data readout on the horizontal axis
d = Number of data
l = Level
f = Frequency
41. At least one of the waveform display settings for Last Result,
Uncorrection Results, and Filter Data must be enabled.
42. Hidden waveforms cannot be specified as the marker trace tar-
get.

3-35
Section 3 Remote Control

Frequency Counter (Notes 5, 43)

Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
Normal STRG_FCNTΔNRM STRG_FCNT? NRM
Storage mode Average STRG_FCNTΔAVG STRG_FCNT? AVG
Max Hold STRG_FCNTΔMAX STRG_FCNT? MAX
Averaging count
CNT_FCNTΔn CNT_FCNT? n n: 2 to 100
(Amount of Count)
Every INTVAL_FCNTΔEVERY INTVAL_FCNT? EVERY
Refresh interval
Once INTVAL_FCNTΔONCE INTVAL_FCNT? ONCE
Automatic range Disabled when
adjustment ADJRNG --- --- Channel Map is
(Adjust Range) IFBand.
Frequency --- CARRF_FCNT? f Unit: Hz
--- CARRFERR_FCNT? f Unit: Hz
CARRFERR_FCNT?
--- f Unit: Hz
Frequency error ΔHZ
CARRFERR_FCNT?
--- p Unit: ppm
ΔPPM

Note:
43. Measurement cannot be performed when System is set to TV
Auto Select.

Saving/Recalling
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
Saving setting parameters to
SVMΔn --- --- n: 0 to 99
memory card
Recalling setting parameters
RCMΔn --- --- n: 0 to 99
from memory card

3-36
3.2 Device Messages

Color Layout (disabled when measurement mode is set to Configuration)

Parameter
Program Msg. Query Msg. Response Msg. Remark
Function Control Item
Pattern 1 COLORPTNΔCOLOR1 COLORPTN? COLOR1
Color Pattern 2 COLORPTNΔCOLOR2 COLORPTN? COLOR2
pattern Pattern 3 COLORPTNΔCOLOR3 COLORPTN? COLOR3
selection Pattern 4 COLORPTNΔCOLOR4 COLORPTN? COLOR4
User Pattern COLORPTNΔUSERCOLOR COLORPTN? USERCOLOR
Pattern 1 COPYCOLORΔCOLOR1 --- ---
Color Pattern 2 COPYCOLORΔCOLOR2 --- ---
pattern copy Pattern 3 COPYCOLORΔCOLOR3 --- ---
Pattern 4 COPYCOLORΔCOLOR4 --- ---
User color
COLORDEFΔn,r,g,b COLORDEF?Δn r,g,b Note 44
definition

Note:
44. n: Frame number
r: Value for red (0 to 15)
g: Value for green (0 to 15)
b: Value for blue (0 to 15)

3-37
Section 3 Remote Control

Other items
Parameter Response
Program Msg. Query Msg. Remark
Function Control Item Msg.
PRE --- ---
Initialization INI --- --- Note 45
IP --- ---
SNGLS --- --- Notes 46, 45
SWP --- ---
Single measurement
TS --- --- Notes 47, 45
Measurement execution
*TRG --- ---
Continuous CONTS --- ---
Note 45
measurement
End --- SWP? SWPΔ0
Measurement status Measurement in --- SWP? SWPΔ1
progress
Measured result --- MSTAT? n Note 48
Error message window HOLD --- ---
deletion

Notes:
45. Refer to Section 8 in the MS8901A Operation Manual Vol. 3 for
command details.

46. The next command is immediately executed.

47. The next command is not executed until measurement is com-

plete.

48. Value of n:

0: Normal end 5: Symbol Unlocked

1: Level Over 6: Not used
2: Over Range 7: Carrier Unlocked
3: Under Range 8: Measurement timeout
4: Signal Abnormal 9: Not used or measurement in
progress

3-38
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

3.3 GPIB Sample Program

This section describes examples of programs for remotely controlling the
ISDB-T signal analysis function of the MX890120B using GPIB com-
mands.

Use of the following environment is assumed: an IBM-PC/AT compatible

with National Instruments AT-GPIB/TNT for Windows 2000/XP incorpo-
rated, and Microsoft Visual Basic.

For detailed information on GPIB and how to control the Spectrum Ana-
lyzer function of the MS8901A, refer to the MS8901A Operation Manual.

Add Vbib-32.bas and Niglobal.bas provided with the NI-488.2 driver as

the standard module when creating a Visual Basic project in the sample
program.

3-39
Section 3 Remote Control

3.3.1 Reading measurement parameters

This section provides an example of a program used to read the parame-
ters set on the MX8901A, including the frequency or channel, and to save
them to a file.

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData function.

Main procedure (measure):

Public Sub MeasParamRead()
‘Define variables
Dim strChannelMap As String
Dim strChannel As String
Dim strFreq As String
Dim strOffsetFreq As String
Dim strSpectrum As String
Dim strRefLevel As String
Dim strMode As String
Dim strGuardInterval As String
Dim strSegment As String
Dim strModulation As String
Dim strPreamp As String
‘**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String

‘Set board
intBoardNo = 0

‘Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

3-40
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

‘Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, T30s, DABend, _
Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

‘Open file destination

Open “C:\My Documents\Param.txt” For Output As #1

‘Read out channel map and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CHASSIGN?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strChannelMap, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Channel Map :”; strChannelMap

‘Read out channel and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CHAN?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strChannel, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Channel :”; strChannel

‘Read out frequency and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “FREQ?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strFreq, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Frequency(Hz) :”; strFreq

‘Read out offset frequency and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “FREQOFS?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strOffsetFreq, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Offset Frequency(Hz) :”; strOffsetFreq

‘Read out spectrum and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “RVSSPECT?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strSpectrum, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Spectrum :”; strSpectrum

3-41
Section 3 Remote Control

‘Read out reference level and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “RFLVL?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strRefLevel, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Reference Level :”; strRefLevel

‘Read out mode and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “TRNSMODE?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strMode, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Mode :”; strMode

‘Read out guard interval and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “GINTERV?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strGuardInterval, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Guard Interval :”; strGuardInterval

‘Read out number of segments and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “SEGMENT?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strSegment, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Segment(A,B,C) :”; strSegment

‘Read out modulation system and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “SEGMOD?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strModulation, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Modulation(A,B,C) :”; strModulation

‘Read out pre-amplifier and save it to the file

Call ibwrt(intUd, “PREAMP?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strPreamp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Print #1, “Preamp :”; strPreamp

‘Close the file

Close
End Sub

3-42
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

3.3.2 Measuring MER

The Conventional MER and the frequency are measured continuously.
While saving the measured results in a file, the minimum and maximum
values of MER and the frequency error are displayed on the screen.
Set the measurement parameter values as shown below:

(1) When RF is selected for Terminal

• Input connector (Terminal) : RF

• Channel Map : Interim-1
• Channel : 13ch
• Reference Level : −20 dBm
• MODE : MODE3
• Guard Interval : 1/4
• Layer_A : 64QAM, 13 segments
• Layer_B : 64QAM, 0 segments
• Layer_C : 64QAM, 0 segments

[1] [2] [3]

MER measurement
Minimum Maximum
value value
MER

Frequency error

Execute

[4] [5] [6]

Figure 3.3.2-1 MER measurement – Frame screen

[1]: Frame
Object name: frmMER
[2]: TextBox
Object name: txtMinMER
[3]: TextBox
Object name: txtMaxMER
[4]: TextBox
Object name: txtMinFreqErr
[5]: TextBox
Object name: txtMaxFreqErr
[6]: CommandButton
Object name: btnExecute
Caption: Execute

3-43
Section 3 Remote Control

Procedure:
Private Sub btnExecute_Click()
If frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = “Execute” Then
frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = “Stop”
Call MerMeasure
Else
frmMER.btnExecute.Enabled = False
frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = “Execute”
End If
End Sub

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData function.

Main procedure (measure):

Public Sub MerMeasure()
‘Define variables
Dim intCount As Integer
Dim intFlag As Integer
Dim sngData(100) As Single
Dim sngMER As Single
Dim sngMaxMER As Single
Dim sngMinMER As Single
Dim sngFreqError As Single
Dim sngMaxFreqError As Single
Dim sngMinFreqError As Single
Dim sngFreq As Double
‘**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

‘Set board
intBoardNo = 0

‘Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

3-44
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

‘Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, T30s, DABend, _
Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

‘Sets initial maximum/minimum values

sngMaxMER = 0
sngMinMER = 100
sngMaxFreqError = −10000
sngMinFreqError = 10000

‘Select signal analysis mode

Call ibwrt(intUd, “PNLMD SYSTEM”)

‘Execute initialization
Call ibwrt(intUd, “PRE”)

‘Set input connector to RF

Call ibwrt(intUd, “ISDBTTERM RF”)

‘Set channel map to Interim1

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CHASSIGN INTERIM1”)

‘Set channel to 13
Call ibwrt(intUd, “CHAN 13”)

‘Set level control method to Ref_Setting

Call ibwrt(intUd, “LVLCTRL REF”)

‘Set reference level to –20 dBm

Call ibwrt(intUd, “RFLVL −20”)

‘Set mode to MODE3

Call ibwrt(intUd, “TRNSMODE 3”)

‘Set guard interval to 1/4

Call ibwrt(intUd, “GINTERV 1PER4”)

3-45
Section 3 Remote Control

‘Set modulation system to 64QAM and set number of seg-

ments to 13
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SEGMENT 13,0,0”)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SEGMOD 64QAM,64QAM,64QAM”)

‘Move to Modulation Analysis screen

Call ibwrt(intUd, “DSPL MODANAL”)

‘Move to No Trace screen on Modulation Analysis screen

Call ibwrt(intUd, “TRFORM NON”)

‘Open file destination

Open “C:\My Documents\MER.txt” For Output As #1

‘Measurement loop
Do
‘Single measurement
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SWP”)

‘Obtain MER (Conventional)

Call ibwrt(intUd, “MER? CONV”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngMER = Val(strTemp)

‘Obtain frequency
Call ibwrt(intUd, “CARRF?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngFreq = Val(strTemp))

‘Obtain frequency error

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CARRFERR? HZ”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngFreqError = Val(strTemp))

‘Write date, time and measured results to the file

Print #1, Date;“,”; Time; “,”; Format(sngFreq, “#.0”); “,”; _
Format(sngMER, “#.00”)

‘Find out the maximum value

If sngMER > sngMaxMER Then
sngMaxMER = sngMER

3-46
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

End If
If sngFreqError > sngMaxFreqError Then
sngMaxFreqError = sngFreqError
End If

‘Find out the minimum value

If sngMER < sngMinMER Then
sngMinMER = sngMER
End If
If sngFreqError < sngMinFreqError Then
sngMinFreqError = sngFreqError
End If

‘Display maximum/minimum values on screen

frmMER.txtMaxMER.Text = sngMaxMER
frmMER.txtMinMER.Text = sngMinMER
frmMER.txtMaxFreqErr.Text = sngMaxFreqError
frmMER.txtMinFreqErr.Text = sngMinFreqError

‘Confirm if the stop button has been pressed

DoEvents
If frmMER.btnExecute.Enabled = False Then Exit Do

Loop

‘Close the file

End Sub

3-47
Section 3 Remote Control

(2) When IQ-DC is selected for Terminal (with MS8901A-18 installed)

• Input connector (Terminal) : IQ-DC

• Impedance : 50 Ω
• Frequency : 500 kHz
• MODE : MODE3
• Guard Interval : 1/4
• Layer_A : 64QAM (PR), 1 segment
• Layer_B : 64QAM, 12 segments
• Layer_C : 64QAM, 0 segment

[1] [2] [3]

MER measurement
Minimum Maximum
value value
MER

Frequency error

Execute

[4] [5] [6]

Figure 3.3.2-2 MER measurement – Frame screen

3-48
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

Procedure:
Private Sub btnExecute_Click()
If frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = "Execution" Then
frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = "Stop"
Call MerMeasure
Else
frmMER.btnExecute.Enabled = False
frmMER.btnExecute.Caption = "Stop"
End If
End Sub

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData function.

Main procedure:
Public Sub MerMeasure()
'Variable definition
Dim intCount As Integer
Dim intFlag As Integer
Dim sngData(100) As Single
Dim sngMER As Single
Dim sngMaxMER As Single
Dim sngMinMER As Single
Dim sngFreqError As Single
Dim sngMaxFreqError As Single
Dim sngMinFreqError As Single
Dim sngFreq As Double
'**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

'Set board
intBoardNo = 0

'Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

3-49
Section 3 Remote Control

'Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

'Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, T30s, DABend, _
Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

'Set max. and min. initial values

sngMaxMER = 0
sngMinMER = 100
sngMaxFreqError = −10000
sngMinFreqError = 10000

'Select signal analysis mode

Call ibwrt(intUd, "PNLMD SYSTEM")

'Initialization
Call ibwrt(intUd, "PRE")

'Set input connector to IQ-DC

Call ibwrt(intUd, "ISDBTTERM IQDC")

'Set impedance to 50 Ω
Call ibwrt(intUd, "TERMINZ 50")

'Set frequency to 500 kHz

Call ibwrt(intUd, "FREQ 500KHz")

'Set mode to MODE3

Call ibwrt(intUd, "TRNSMODE 3")

'Set guard interval to 1/4

Call ibwrt(intUd, "GINTERV 1PER4")

'Set modulation mode to partial reception 64QAM, and number

of segments to 1,12,0
Call ibwrt(intUd, "SEGMENT 1,12,0")
Call ibwrt(intUd, "SEGMOD PR64QAM,64QAM,64QAM")

'Shift to Modulation Analysis screen

Call ibwrt(intUd, "DSPL MODANAL")

3-50
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

'Set to partial reception (1 segment)

Call ibwrt(intUd, "RECVSEG 1SEG")

'Shift to No Trace screen of Modulation Analysis

Call ibwrt(intUd, "TRFORM NON")

'Open file saving destination

Open "CMy DocumentsMER.txt" For Output As #1

'Measurement loop
Do
'1 measurement
Call ibwrt(intUd, "SWP")

'Obtain MER(Conventional)
Call ibwrt(intUd, "MER? CONV")
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngMER = Val(strTemp)

'Obtain frequency
Call ibwrt(intUd, "CARRF?")
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngFreq = Val(strTemp)

'Obtain the frequency error

Call ibwrt(intUd, "CARRFERR? HZ")
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngFreqError = Val(strTemp)
'Write date and measured result to file
Print #1, Date; ","; Time; ","; Format(sngFreq, "#.0"); ","; _
Format(sngMER, "#.00")

'Search the maximum value

If sngMER > sngMaxMER Then
sngMaxMER = sngMER
End If
If sngFreqError > sngMaxFreqError Then
sngMaxFreqError = sngFreqError
End If

3-51
Section 3 Remote Control

'Search the minimum value

If sngMER < sngMinMER Then
sngMinMER = sngMER
End If
If sngFreqError < sngMinFreqError Then
sngMinFreqError = sngFreqError
End If

'Display the maximum and minimum values in the screen

frmMer.txtMaxMER.Text = sngMaxMER
frmMer.txtMinMER.Text = sngMinMER
frmMer.txtMaxFreqErr.Text = sngMaxFreqError
frmMer.txtMinFreqErr.Text = sngMinFreqError

'Check if the Stop button is pressed

DoEvents
If frmMer.btnExecute.Enabled = False Then Exit Do

Loop

'Close file
Close

End Sub

3-52
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

3.3.3 Measuring constellation

The constellation I and Q values are read out and the I and Q data is
saved to a file while displaying the constellation on the screen.
The reception signal is assumed to be as shown below:

Modulation mode : MODE1

Guard interval : 1/4
Layer_A : 64QAM, 13 segments

[1] [2] [3]

Execute

Figure 3.3.3-1 Constellation measurement – Frame screen

[1]: Frame
Object name: frmConstellation
[2]: PictureBox
Object name: picGraph
Height: 6000
ScaleHeight: 20
ScaleLeft: –10
ScaleTop: –10
ScaleWidth: 20
Width: 6000
[3]: CommandButton
Object name: btnExecute
Caption: Execute

3-53
Section 3 Remote Control

Procedure:
Public Sub btnExecute_Click()
frmConstellation.btnExecute.Enabled = False
Call ConstellationMeasure
End Sub

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData function.

Main procedure:
Public Sub ConstellationMeasure()
‘Define variables
Dim intN As Integer
Dim sngI(5000) As Single
Dim sngQ(5000) As Single
‘**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

‘Set board
intBoardNo = 0

‘Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

‘Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, T30s, DABend, _
Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

3-54
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

‘Initialize graph screen

frmConstellation.picGraph.Cls

‘Open file destination

Open “C:\My Documents\Constellation.txt” For Output As
#1

‘Loop for reading I,Q data

For intN = 1 To 4992
DoEvents
‘Read out constellation waveform data (I, Q)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “XMC? LAYERA,0,” + Str(intN) + “,1”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngI(intN) = Val(strTemp)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “XMC? LAYERA,1,” + Str(intN) + “,1”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
sngQ(intN) = Val(strTemp)

‘Write point number, I data and Q data to the file

Print #1, intN; “,”; sngI(intN); “,”; sngQ(intN)

‘Write constellation waveform data to graph screen

frmConstellation.picGraph.Circle (sngI(intN),
-sngQ(intN)), 0.01
Next intN

‘Close the file

‘Enable the Execute button

frmConstellation.btnExecute.Enabled = True

End Sub

3-55
Section 3 Remote Control

3.3.4 C/N measurement

Enter the carrier frequency to be measured in [2] in Figure 3.3.4-1 below.
The C/N measured results at offset frequencies of 1 kHz, 10 kHz and 100
kHz are displayed on the screen by averaging the measured results for
100 measurements.

[1] [2]
×

Carrier frequency MHz

[3]

Offset frequency [4]

1kHz [5]

10kHz

100kH [6]

Execute

Figure 3.3.4-1 C/N measurement – Frame screen

[1]: Frame
Object name: frmCN
[2]: TextBox
Object name: txtFreq
[3]: TextBox
Object name: txtCN1kHz
[4]: TextBox
Object name: txtCN10kHz
[5]: TextBox
Object name: txtCN100kHz
[6]: CommandButton
Object name: btnExecute
Caption: Execute

3-56
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

Procedure:
Private Sub btnExecute_Click()
frmCN.btnExecute.Enabled = False
Call CNMeasure
End Sub

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData and Wait_delay functions.

Main procedure:
Public Sub CNMeasure()
‘Define variables
Dim intCount As Integer
Dim sngData(100) As Single
Dim intFlag As Integer
Dim strFreq As String
Dim sngCN1kHz As Single
Dim sngCN10kHz As Single
Dim sngCN100kHz As Single
‘**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

‘Set board
intBoardNo = 0

‘Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

3-57
Section 3 Remote Control

‘Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, TNONE,_
DABend, Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

‘Initialize MS8901A
Call ibwrt(intUd, “PRE”)

‘Select Channel Map

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CHASSIGN GENERAL”)

‘Select C/N measurement screen

Call ibwrt(intUd, “DSPL CN”)

‘Set reference level to −20 dBm

Call ibwrt(intUd, “RFLVL −20”)

‘Set storage mode to average

Call ibwrt(intUd, “STRG_CN AVG”)

‘Set averaging count to 100

Call ibwrt(intUd, “CNT_CN 100”)

‘Read out set frequency

strFreq = frmCN.txtFreq.Text

‘Set frequency on MS8901A

Call ibwrt(intUd, “FREQ “ + strFreq + “MHZ”)

‘Single measurement
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SWP”)

‘Wait measurement completion in 1-sec steps

Do
Wait_delay (1#)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SWP?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo. intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Loop While strTemp <> “SWP 0”

3-58
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

‘Read out C/N

Call ibwrt(intUd, “MKL_CN? 1000”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc (strListenTerm))
frmCN.txtCN1kHz.Text = strTemp
Call ibwrt(intUd, “MKL_CN? 10000”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc (strListenTerm))
frmCN.txtCN10kHz.Text = strTemp
Call ibwrt(intUd, “MKL_CN? 100000”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc (strListenTerm))
frmCN.txtCN100kHz.Text = strTemp

‘Enable the Execute button

frmCN.btnExecute.Enabled = True

End Sub

3-59
Section 3 Remote Control

3.3.5 Spectrum mask measurement

The occupied frequency and judgement result are read and displayed on
the screen.

[1] [2]

×
Spectrum mask measurement

Occupied Hz
Frequency
Judgement
Result

Execute

[3] [4]
Figure 3.3.5-1 Spectrum mask measurement – Frame screen
[1]: Frame
Object name: frmSpectrummask
[2]: TextBox
Object name: txtOBW
[3]: TextBox
Object name: txtCheckmask
[4]: CommandButton
Object name: btnExecute
Caption: Execute
Procedure:
Public Sub btnExecute_Click()
frmSpectrummask Enabled = False
Call SpectrummaskMeasure
End Sub

Note:
Refer to Section 3.3.6 “Sample program for common functions” for
the ReadData and Wait_delay functions.

3-60
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

Main procedure:
Public Sub SpectrummaskMeasure()
‘Define variables
Dim intMASK_STS As Integer
‘**
Dim intBoardNo As Integer
Dim intAddr As Integer
Dim intSubAddr As Integer
Dim intUd As Integer
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

‘Set board
intBoardNo = 0

‘Set address
intAddr = 1
intSubAddr = 0

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

‘Initialize GPIB
Call ibrsc(intBoardNo, 1)
Call ibsre(intBoardNo, 1)
Call SendIFC(intBoardNo)
Call ibdev(intBoardNo, intAddr, intSubAddr, T30s, DABend,
_Asc(strListenTerm), intUd)

‘Initialize MS8901A
Call ibwrt(intUd, “PRE”)

‘Select Spectrum Mask measurement screen

Call ibwrt(intUd, “DSPL MASK”)

‘Select MASK line

Call ibwrt(intUd, “SPMASK TRANS”)

‘Single measurement
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SINGLS”)

3-61
Section 3 Remote Control

‘Wait measurement completion in 1-sec steps

Do
Wait_delay (1#)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “SWP?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo. intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
Loop While strTemp <> “SWP 0”

‘Wait measurement completion in 1/5-sec steps

Do
Wait_delay (1#)
Call ibwrt(intUd, “MASK_STS?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo. intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc(strListenTerm))
intMASK_STS = Val(strTemp)
Loop While intMASK_STS <> 0

‘Obtain occupied frequency bandwidth

Call ibwrt(intUd, “OBW?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc (strListenTerm))
frmSpectrummask.txtOBW.Text = strTemp

‘Obtain judgement result

Call ibwrt(intUd, “MASK_CHECK?”)
Call ReadData(intBoardNo, intAddr, strTemp, _
Asc (strListenTerm))
frmSpectrummask.txtCheckmask.Text = strTemp

End Sub

3-62
3.3 GPIB Sample Program

3.3.6 Sample program for common functions

This section provides a program example of the common functions used
in the sample programs in Section 3.3.1 “Reading measurement parame-
ters” through 3.3.5 “Spectrum mask measurement.”

ibdev( ) and Receive() are functions provided by the NI-488.2 driver.

Refer to the online manual provided by National Instruments for details
of these functions.

Subroutine (ReadData):
Sub ReadData(ByVal ud As Integer, ByVal addr As Integer, _
buf As String, ByVal term As Integer)
Dim intJc As Integer
Dim intIc As Integer

buf = Space(255)’Space compensation

Call Receive(ud, addr, buf, term)

intJc = InStr(buf, vbLf) ‘LF detection point

intIc = InStr(buf, vbCrLf) ‘CR/LF detection point
If intIc% <> 0 Then
‘Processing for CR/LF detection
If intIc < intJc Then
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, intIc% - 1)
Else
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, intJc% - 1)
End If
If intJc% <> 0 Then
‘Processing for LF detection
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, intJc% - 1)
Else
’Processing for EOI only
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, ibcntl)
End If
End Sub

3-63
Section 3 Remote Control

Subroutine (Wait_delay):
Public Function Wait_delay(PauseTime As Single)
Dim Start, Finish
Start = Timer ‘Sets interruption start time
Finish = Start + PauseTime ‘Sets interruption end time
Do While Timer < Finish
DoEvents ‘Transfers the control to an-
other process
Loop
End Function

3-64
3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program

3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program

This section provides examples of programs for remotely controlling the
ISDB-T signal analysis function of the MX890120B via ETHERNET.

Use of the following environment is assumed: an IBM-PC/AT compatible

with ETHERNET card incorporated, and Microsoft Visual Basic.

For details of the ETHERNET card, refer to the operation manual of the
ETHERNET manufacturer.

For how to control the Spectrum Analyzer function of the MS8901A, refer
to the MS8901A Operation Manual.

3.4.1 Measuring constellation

The constellation I and Q values are read out and the I and Q data is
saved to a file while displaying the constellation on the screen.

The following is assumed in this sample program.

• IBM-PC/AT compatible side IP address : 192.168.100.123

• MS8901A side IP address : 192.168.100.100
• MS8901A side port number : 9111

The reception signal is assumed to be as shown below:

Modulation mode : MODE1

Guard interval : 1/4
Layer_A : 64QAM, 13 segments

3-65
Section 3 Remote Control

[1] [2] [3]

Execute

[4]

Figure 3.4.1-1 Constellation measurement – Frame screen

[1]: Frame
Object name: frmConstellation
[2]: PictureBox
Object name: picGraph
Height: 6000
ScaleHeight: 20
ScaleLeft: −10
ScaleTop: −10
ScaleWidth: 20
Width: 6000
[3]: CommandButton
Object name: btnExecute
Caption: Execute
[4]: Winsock
Object name: WinsockConstellation

3-66
3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program

'Procedure:
Public WaitConnectFlg As Boolean ‘Connection wait flag
Public SendFlg As Boolean ‘Transmission end flag
Public RcvData As String ‘Reception data buffer

Public Sub btnExecute_Click()

frmConstellationSocket.btnExecute.Enabled = False
Call ConstellationMeasure
End Sub

‘Event processing when connection established

Private Sub WinsockConstellation_Connect()
‘Set connection wait flag
WaitConnectFlg = True
End Sub

‘Event processing on data reception

Private Sub WinsockConstellation_DataArrival( _
ByVal bytesTotal As Long)
‘Read reception data to reception data buffer
WinsockConstellation.GetData RcvData, vbByte
End Sub

‘Event processing on data transmission end

Private Sub WinsockConstellation_SendComplete()
‘Set transmission end flag
SendFlg = True
End Sub

'Main procedure:
Public Sub ConstellationMeasure()
'Variable definition
Dim intN As Integer
Dim sngI(5000) As Single
Dim sngQ(5000) As Single
'**
Dim strListenTerm As String
Dim strTemp As String

'Set IP address and port number

frmConstellationSocket.WinsockConstellation.RemoteHost _
= "192.168.100.100"
frmConstellationSocket.WinsockConstellation.RemotePort = 9111

3-67
Section 3 Remote Control

'Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbCrLf

'Establish connection
frmConstellationSocket.WaitConnectFlg = False
'Clear connection wait flag
frmConstellationSocket.WinsockConstellation.Connect
Call WaitConnection 'Wait connection

'Initialize graph screen

frmConstellationSocket.picGraph.Cls

'Open file saving destination

Open "C:\My Documents\Constellation.txt" For Output As #1

'Loop for reading I and Q data

For intN = 1 To 4992
DoEvents
'Read constellation waveform data (I, Q)
SendDataSocket "XMC? LAYERA,0," + Str(intN) + ",1"
Call ReadDataSocket (strTemp, Asc(strListenTerm))
sngI(intN) = Val(strTemp)
SendDataSocket "XMC? LAYERA,1," + Str(intN) + ",1"
Call ReadDataSocket (strTemp,Asc(strListenTerm))
sngQ(intN) = Val(strTemp)

'Write point number and I, Q data to file

Print #1, intN; ","; sngI(intN); ","; sngQ(intN)

'Write constellation waveform data to graph screen

frmConstellationSocket.picGraph.Circle (sngI(intN), _
-sngQ(intN)), 0.01
Next intN

'Close file
Close

'Enable the Execution button

frmConstellationSocket.btnExecute.Enabled = True

End Sub

'Subroutine:

3-68
3.4 ETHERNET Sample Program

'Process wait connection

Sub WaitConnection()
Do
DoEvents
Loop Until frmConstellationSocket.WaitConnectFlg = True
End Sub

‘Transmit data
Sub SendDataSocket(buf As String)
frmConstellationSocket.RcvData = "" 'Clear reception buffer
frmConstellationSocket.SendFlg = False 'Clear transmission
end flag
'Transmit data
frmConstellationSocket.WinsockConstellation.SendData buf
&_
strListenTerm

'Wait transmission end

Do
DoEvents
Loop Until frmConstellationSocket.SendFlg = True

End Sub

‘Receive data
Sub ReadDataSocket(buf As String, ByVal term As Integer)
Dim intJc As Integer

buf = "" 'Clear buffer

'Read receive data

Do
'Process data reception wait
Do
DoEvents
Loop Until frmConstellationSocket.RcvData <> ""
buf = buf & frmConstellationSocket.RcvData
frmConstellationSocket.RcvData = "" 'Clear reception buffer

'Detect if up to the terminator is read

intJc = InStr(buf, vbLf) 'LF detection position

3-69
Section 3 Remote Control

If intJc <> 0 Then

Exit Do
End If
Loop

'Delete terminator
intJc = InStr(buf, vbLf) 'LF detection position
If intJc <> 0 Then 'Processing at LF detection
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, intJc% - 1)
End If

End Sub

3-70
3.5 RS-232C Sample Program

3.5 RS-232C Sample Program

This section provides an example of a program for remotely controlling
the ISDB-T signal analysis function of the MX890120B using RS-232C.

Use of the following environment is assumed: an IBM-PC/AT compatible

with an RS-232C port, and Microsoft Visual Basic.

Refer to the MS890120B Operation Manual, for how to control the Spec-
trum Analyzer function of the MS8901A.

3.5.1 Measuring constellation

The constellation I and Q values are read out and the I and Q data are
saved to a file while the constellation is displayed on the screen.

The following parameters are assumed in this sample program.

• RS-232C on IBM-PC/AT compatible: CommPort1

• RS-232C on MS8901A
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Parity: Off
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop Bit: 1 bit
XON/XOFF Flow Control: On

The reception signal is assumed to be as shown below:

• Modulation mode: MODE1

• Guard Interval: 1/4
• Layer-A: 64QAM, 13 segment

3-71
Section 3 Remote Control

[1] [2] [3]

Execute

[4]

Figure 3.5.1-1 Constellation measurement – Frame screen

Public strListenTerm As String

Public Sub ConstellationMeasureSerial()
‘Define variables
Dim intN As Integer
Dim sngI(5000) As Single
Dim sngQ(5000) As Single
‘**
Dim strTemp As String

3-72
3.5 RS-232C Sample Program

‘Set terminator
strListenTerm = vbLf

‘Initialize RS-232C
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.Settings = _
“9600,N,8,1”
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.Handshaking =
_
comXOnXoff
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.RTSEnable =
True
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.PortOpen = True

‘Initialize graph screen

frmConstellationSerial.picGraph.Cls

‘Open the file destination

Open “C:\My Documents\Constellation.txt” For Output As #1

‘Loop for reading I, Q data

For intN = 1 To 4992
DoEvents
‘Read out constellation waveform data (I, Q)
SendDataSerial “XMC? LAYERA,0,” + Str(intN) + “,1”
Call ReadDataSerial(strTemp, Asc(strListenTerm))
sngI(intN) = Val(strTemp)
SendDataSerial “XMC? LAYERA,1,” + Str(intN) + “,1”
Call ReadDataSerial(strTemp, Asc(strListenTerm))
sngQ(intN) = Val(strTemp)

‘Write point number, I data and Q data to the file

Print #1, intN; “,”; sngI(intN); “,”; sngQ(intN)

‘Write constellation waveform data to graph screen

frmConstellationSerial.picGraph.Circle (sngI(intN), _
-sngQ(intN)), 0.01
Next intN

‘Close the file

‘Close the port

frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.PortOpen = False

3-73
Section 3 Remote Control

‘Enable the Execute button

frmConstellationSerial.btnExecute.Enabled = True

End Sub
Sub SendDataSerial(buf As String)
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.InBufferCount = 0
_
‘Clear reception buffer
‘Transmit data
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.Output = buf & _
strListenTerm
End Sub
Function ReadDataSerial(buf As String, ByVal term As Integer) _
As String
Dim intJc As Integer
buf = “” ‘Clear buffer
‘Read receive data
Do
‘Process data reception wait
Do
buf = _
buf & frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.Input
DoEvents
Loop Until _
frmConstellationSerial.MSCommConstellation.InBufferCount = 0
‘Detect if up to the terminator is read
intJc = InStr(buf, strListenTerm) 'LF detection position
If intJc <> 0 Then
Exit Do
End If
Loop
‘Delete terminator
intJc = InStr(buf, strListenTerm) 'LF Detection position
If intJc <> 0 Then 'Processing at LF detection
buf = Mid$(buf, 1, intJc% - 1)
End If
End Function

3-74.
Chapter 4 Performance Test
This chapter describes the performance test for the ISDB-T signal analysis
function of the MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer in which the
MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software is installed.
Refer to the MS8901A Operation Manual for the performance test proce-
dures of the spectrum analyzer function.

4.1 When Performance Test Is Required ........................ 4-2

4.2 List of Equipment for Performance Test .................... 4-3
4.3 Performance Test ...................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Frequency measurement accuracy
(modulation wave) ......................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Frequency lock range .................................... 4-9
4.3.3 Residual C/N ................................................. 4-13
4.3.4 Frequency measurement accuracy (CW)...... 4-15
4.3.5 Frequency measurement accuracy
(modulation wave) with MS8901A-18
installed ......................................................... 4-17
4.3.6 Frequency lock range with MS8901A-18
installed ......................................................... 4-20

4-1
Section 4 Performance Test

4.1 When Performance Test Is Required

The performance test is carried out as part of preventive maintenance
against performance deterioration when the MX890120B ISDB-T Signal
Analysis Software is installed in the MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal
Analyzer. It should be performed in the incoming acceptance inspection
and regular inspection of the MS8901A + MX890120B, and to check the
performance following repairs.

Be sure to regularly implement performance test items deemed impor-

tant as preventive maintenance. Regular tests are recommended to be
carried out about once or twice a year.

Check the following performance test items:

• Frequency measurement accuracy (modulation wave)
• Frequency lock range
• Residual C/N
• Frequency measurement accuracy (CW)
• Frequency measurement accuracy (modulation wave) with
MS8901A-18 installed
• Frequency lock range with MS8901A-18 installed

If you find an item that does not meet the specifications during the per-
formance test, please contact your local Anritsu Sales Representative or
Service Center.

4-2
4.2 List of Equipment for Performance Test

4.2 List of Equipment for Performance Test

Recommended Required
Test item Name
model performance
Digital Broadcast MG8940A Output frequency
Signal Generator 30 MHz to 1 GHz,
conforming to the
ISDB-T standards
Frequency Power Meter ML2437A Input/output frequency:
measurement
30 to 200 MHz
accuracy
(modulation Power Sensor MA2422A Thermal sensor
wave) Amplifier A3000-2-M Input/output frequency:
30 to 200 MHz,
20 dB
3 dB Fixed MP721A Input impedance: 50 Ω
Attenuator
Frequency Digital Broadcast MG8940A Output frequency
lock range Signal Generator 30 MHz to 1 GHz,
conforming to the
ISDB-T standards
Power Meter ML2437A Input/output frequency:
30 to 200 MHz
Power Sensor MA2422A Thermal sensor
Residual C/N Signal Generator MG3633A Output frequency:
32 to 2700 MHz,
−138 dBc/Hz
Frequency Signal Generator MG3633A Output frequency:
measurement 32 to 2700 MHz,
accuracy (CW) −138 dBc/Hz
Frequency Arbitrary wave- AWG420 IQ output band
measurement form generator 25 MHz or higher
accuracy
(modulation
wave) with
MS8901A-18
installed
Frequency lock Arbitrary wave- AWG420 IQ output band
range with form generator 25 MHz or higher
MS8901A-18
installed
Note:
When using the arbitrary waveform generator, the clock accuracy
may be insufficient. In this case, it is recommended to use the fol-
lowing as the FFT clock generation source.

Device name Recommended model

Signal generator MG3633A

4-3
Section 4 Performance Test

4.3 Performance Test

Warm up the DUT and measuring equipment for at least 30 minutes un-
less otherwise specified. We recommend that you observe the following
points to ensure maximum measurement accuracy:

• Carry out the test at room temperature

• Minimize AC voltage fluctuation
• Eliminate effects from noise, vibration, dust, humidity or other prob-
lems

4.3.1 Frequency measurement accuracy (modulation wave)

(1) Specifications
• Frequency: 32 to 1000 [MHz]
• Level range: +10 to 26 dBm (pre-amplifier: Off)
−46 to −10 dBm (pre-amplifier: On)

When one wave of the OFDM modulation signal that conforms to

ISDB-T is input:
• Measurement target signal 1
± 0.15 Hz + (Reference frequency accuracy × Set frequency) when
average count is 5 under the following conditions:
± 0.1 Hz + (Reference frequency accuracy × Set frequency) when
average count is 40 under the following conditions:
Mode: Mode3, Guard interval: 1/8, Segmentation offset: 512,
Modulation system for all segments of Layers_A to C: 64QAM

• Measurement target signal 2

±1.6 Hz + (Reference frequency accuracy × Set frequency) under
the following conditions:
Mode: Mode1, Guard interval: 1/4, Segmentation offset: 128,
Modulation system for all segments of Layers_A to C: DQPSK,
Average count: 5

(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator MG8940A
Power Meter ML2437A
Power Sensor MA2422A
Amplifier A3000-2-M
3 dB Fixed Attenuator MP721A

4-4
4.3 Performance Test

(3) Setup
When pre-amplifier: Off
10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator

RF Input
RF Output
Amplifier

Power Meter 3dB 3dB

Power Sensor

When pre-amplifier: On
10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator

RF Input
RF Output
Power Meter

Power Sensor

4-5
Section 4 Performance Test

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Initialize the Digital Broadcast Signal Generator.
Then set as follows:
Frequency: 32 MHz
Modulation mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
Modulation system: 64QAM, 13 segments
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Channel map: General
Frequency: 32 MHz
Level control: Ref Setting
Reference level: +10 dBm
Modulation mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
Modulation system: 64QAM, 13 segments

No Trace screen
Pre-amplifier: Off
Segmentation offset: 512
Storage mode: Average
Average count: 5
Recv. Seg: 13 Seg
3. Connect the 3 dB fixed attenuator on the amplifier out-
put side to the power sensor. Adjust the output level of
the Digital Broadcast Signal Generator so that the
output level becomes +10 dBm. This setting level is Po
[dBm].
4. Connect the 3 dB fixed attenuator to the MS8901A.
5. Press the Single key on the MS8901A to perform Fre-
quency Error (Hz) measurement.
6. Set the level of the Digital Broadcast Signal Generator
to Po – 36[dBm] (–26 dBm at MS8901A input.)
7. Set the reference level of the MS8901A to –26 dBm.
Press the Single key to perform Frequency Error (Hz)
measurement.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to perform measurements for
the parameter sets described in (5).
Remove the 3 dB fixed attenuator and amplifier when
the pre-amplifier is On.

4-6
4.3 Performance Test

(5) Measured results

• Measurement target signal 1, Pre-amplifier: Off, Mode: Mode3,
Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64QAM, Storage
mode: Average, Average count: 5

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
2 32 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
3 500 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
4 500 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
5 1000 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
6 1000 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01

• Measurement target signal 1, Pre-amplifier: Off, Mode: Mode3,

Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64 QAM, Storage
mode: Average, Average Count: 40

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
2 32 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
3 500 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
4 500 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
5 1000 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
6 1000 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01

• Measurement target signal 2, Pre-amplifier: Off, Mode: Mode1,

Segmentation offset: 128, Modulation system: DQPSK, Storage
mode: Average, Average count: 5

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
2 32 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
3 500 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
4 500 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
5 1000 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
6 1000 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1

4-7
Section 4 Performance Test

• Measurement target signal 1, Pre-amplifier: On, Mode: Mode3,

Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64 QAM, Storage
mode: Average, Average Count: 5

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
2 32 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
3 500 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
4 500 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
5 1000 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
6 1000 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01

• Measurement target signal 1, Pre-amplifier: On, Mode: Mode3,

Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64 QAM, Storage
mode: Average, Average count: 40

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
2 32 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
3 500 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
4 500 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
5 1000 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
6 1000 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01

• Measurement target signal 2, Pre-amplifier: On, Mode: Mode1,

Segmentation offset: 128, Modulation system: DQPSK, Storage
mode: Average, Average count: 5

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

Frequency Level
No. specification effective value effective specification band
(MHz) (dBm)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
2 32 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
3 500 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
4 500 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
5 1000 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
6 1000 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1

4-8
4.3 Performance Test

4.3.2 Frequency lock range

(1) Specifications
±99 kHz
(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator MG8940A

(3) Setup
10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator

RF Input
RF Output

4-9
Section 4 Performance Test

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Initialize the Digital Broadcast Signal Generator.
Then set as follows:
Frequency: 32 MHz
Level: −20 dBm
Modulation mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
Modulation system: 64QAM, 13 segments
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Channel map: General
Frequency: 32 MHz
Level control: Ref Setting
Reference level: −20 dBm
Modulation mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
Modulation system: 64QAM, 13 segments

No Trace screen
Pre-amplifier: Off
Segmentation offset: 512
Storage mode: Average
Average count: 5
Recv. Seg: 13 Seg
3. Set the frequency of the Digital Broadcast Signal Gen-
erator to 32 MHz + 99 kHz.
4. Press the Single key on the MS8901A to perform meas-
urement once. Confirm that Frequency Error is within
the specification.
5. Set the average count to 40 times on the Modulation
Analysis screen of MS8901A and then press the Single
key to perform measurement once. Confirm that Fre-
quency Error is within the specification.
∗ This confirmation is unnecessary when the Mode is
set to Mode1.
6. Set the frequency of the Digital Broadcast Signal Gen-
erator to 32 MHz - 99 kHz.
7. Set the average count to 5 times on the Modulation
Analysis screen of MS8901A and then press the Single
key on the MS8901A to perform measurement once.
Confirm that Frequency Error is within the specifica-
tion.
8. Set the average count to 40 times on the Modulation
Analysis screen of MS8901A and then press the Single
key to perform measurement once. Confirm that Fre-
quency Error is within the specification.
* This confirmation is unnecessary when the Mode is
set to Mode1.

4-10
4.3 Performance Test

Step Operation
9. Change the setting of the Digital Broadcast Signal Gen-
erator and MS8901A for measurement target signal 2
(see 4.3.1 (5) Specifications above), then repeat Steps 1
through 8 above to perform measurement in the same
way.

4-11
Section 4 Performance Test

(5) Measured results

Lower Lower
Upper
Measure- limit of effec- Measured Upper ef- Guard
Average limit of
No. ment tar- Frequency specifi- tive value fective limit band
count specifica-
get signal cation limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
tion (Hz)
(Hz) (Hz)

1 32 MHz
1 5 −0.15 −0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
+ 99 kHz
2 32 MHz
1 40 −0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
+ 99 kHz
3 32 MHz
1 5 −0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
− 99 kHz
4 32 MHz
1 40 −0.10 −0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
− 99 kHz
5 32 MHz
2 5 −1.6 −1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
+ 99 kHz
6 32 MHz
2 5 −1.6 −1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
− 99 kHz

• Measurement target signal 1

Mode: Mode3, Guard Interval: 1/8, Segmentation offset: 512,
Modulation system of all the segments among Layer_A to C: 64 QAM

• Measurement target signal 2

Mode: Mode1, Guard Interval: 1/4, Segmentation offset: 128, Modula
tion system of all the segments among Layer_A to C: DQPSK

4-12
4.3 Performance Test

4.3.3 Residual C/N

(1) Specifications
When CW, frequency: 500 MHz, level: –10 dBm:
≤ –95 dBc/Hz (1-kHz offset)
≤ –108 dBc/Hz (10-kHz offset)
≤ –118 dBc/Hz (100-kHz offset)
(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Signal Generator MG3633A

(3) Setup
10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Signal Generator

RF Input
RF Output

4-13
Section 4 Performance Test

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Initialize the Signal Generator. Then set as follows:
Frequency: 500 MHz
Level: –10 dBm
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Channel map: General
Frequency: 500 MHz
Level control: Ref Setting
Reference level: –10 dBm

C/N screen
Pre-amplifier: Off
Storage mode: Average
Average count: 100
3. Press the Single key on the MS8901A to perform meas-
urement. Then read the C/N values at a 1-kHz, 10-kHz
and 100-kHz offset by using the marker.

(5) Measured results

Offset Measured Upper limit of
Upper effective Guard band
No. frequency value specification
limit (dBc/Hz) (Hz)
(kHz) (dBc/Hz) (dBc/Hz)
1 1 –95.1 –95 0.1
2 10 –108.1 –108 0.1
3 100 –118.1 –118 0.1

4-14
4.3 Performance Test

4.3.4 Frequency measurement accuracy (CW)

(1) Specifications
±0.1 Hz + (Reference frequency accuracy × Measurement frequency)
(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Signal Generator MG3633A

(3) Setup
10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Digital Broadcast Signal Generator

RF Input
RF Output

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Initialize the Signal Generator. Then set as follows:
Frequency: 32 MHz
Level: –10 dBm
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Channel map: General
Frequency: 32 MHz
Level control: Ref Setting
Reference level: –10 dBm

C/N screen
Pre-amplifier: Off
Storage mode: Average
Average count: 5
3. Press the Single key on the MS8901A to perform meas-
urement and read Frequency Error.
4. Perform measurements for the parameter sets de-
scribed in (5).

4-15
Section 4 Performance Test

(5) Measured results

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of
Frequency Guard
No. specification effective value effective specification
(MHz) band (Hz)
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz)
1 32 –0.1 –0.08 +0.08 +0.1 0.02
2 500 –0.1 –0.08 +0.08 +0.1 0.02
3 1000 –0.1 –0.08 +0.08 +0.1 0.02

4-16
4.3 Performance Test

4.3.5 Frequency measurement accuracy (modulation wave) with

MS8901A-18 installed
(1) Specifications
• Frequency: 250 to 5000 [kHz]
When one wave of an OFDM modulation signal that conforms to
ISDB-T is input:
• Measurement target signal:
Terminal: Low IF-DC or IQ-DC, Impedance: 50 Ω, Mode: Mode3,
Guard interval: 1/8, Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system
for partial reception signal: 64QAM, Input level: 0.1 Vrms
± 0.15 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × Measurement fre-
quency) when average count is 5 times

± 0.1 Hz + (reference frequency accuracy × Measurement fre-

quency) when average count is 40 times

(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Arbitrary waveform generator AWG420 (manufactured
by Tektronix)

(3) Setup

10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Arbitrary waveform generator

I Q
I Output Q Output

4-17
Section 4 Performance Test

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Create the waveform data to generate the IQ signal of
the measurement target signal that conforms to
ISDB-T and load it to the arbitrary waveform genera-
tor.
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Terminal: Low IF-DC
Impedance: 50 Ω
Frequency: 500 kHz
Mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
TMCC
Layer_A Segment: 1
Layer_A Mod: 64QAM (PR)
Layer_B Segment: 12
Layer_B Mod: 64QAM
Layer_C Segment: 0
Layer_C Mod: 64QAM
Modulation Analysis screen
Recv. Seg: 1 Seg Mode
Storage mode Average
Average count 5
Press the Single key of MS8901A to perform measure-
ment. Read Frequency Error.
3. Change the Terminal setting to IQ-DC, and perform
measurement repeating Step 2 above.
4. Perform measurements for the parameter sets de-
scribed in 4.3.5 (5) Specification in the way of Step 1
through 3 above.

4-18
4.3 Performance Test

(5) Measured results

Mode: Mode3, Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64QAM,
Storage mode: Average, Average count: 5 times

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

No. Terminal specification effective value effective specification band
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 Low IF-DC –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
2 IQ-DC –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01

Mode: Mode3, Segmentation offset: 512, Modulation system: 64QAM,

Storage mode: Average, Average count: 40 times

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard

No. Terminal specification effective value effective specification band
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
1 Low IF-DC –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
2 IQ-DC –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01

4-19
Section 4 Performance Test

4.3.6 Frequency lock range with MS8901A-18 installed

(1) Specifications
±99 kHz

(2) Measuring instruments used in testing

Name Recommended model

Arbitrary waveform generator AWG420 (manufactured
by Tektronix)

(3) Setup

10 MHz Input

10 MHz Output

Arbitrary waveform generator

I Q
I Output Q Output

4-20
4.3 Performance Test

(4) Test procedure

Step Operation
1. Create the waveform data to generate the IQ signal of
the measurement target signal that conforms to
ISDB-T and load it to the arbitrary waveform genera-
tor.
2. Initialize the MS8901A. Then set as follows:
Terminal: Low IF-DC
Impedance: 50 Ω
Frequency: 500 kHz
Mode: Mode3
Guard interval: 1/8
TMCC
Layer_A Segment: 1
Layer_A Mod: 64QAM (PR)
Layer_B Segment: 12
Layer_B Mod: 64QAM
Layer_C Segment: 0
Layer_C Mod: 64QAM
Modulation Analysis screen
Recv. Seg: 1 Seg Mode
Storage mode Average
Storage count 5
3. Set the MS8901A frequency to 500 kHz + 99 kHz.
4. Press the Single key of the MS8901A to perform meas-
urement. Read Frequency Error.
5. Set the MS8901A frequency to 500 kHz − 99 kHz.
6. Press the Single key of the MS8901A to perform meas-
urement. Read Frequency Error.
7. Change the average count to 40 times on the MS8901A
Modulation Analysis screen, repeating Step 3 through 6
above.
8. Change the Terminal setting to IQ-DC, and perform
measurement repeating Step 3 through 7 above.

4-21
Section 4 Performance Test

(5) Measured results

Lower
Fre- limit of
Aver- Lower Measured Upper Upper limit of Guard
speci-
No. Terminal quency age effective value effective specification band
fica-
(kHz) count ) tion limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
(Hz)

1 Low 500 − 5 −0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01

IF-DC 99
2 Low 500 + 5 −0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
IF-DC 99
3 Low 500 − 40 −0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
IF-DC 99
4 Low 500 + 40 −0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
IF-DC 99
5 IQ-DC 500 − 5 −0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
99
6 IQ-DC 500 − 5 −0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
99
7 IQ-DC 500 + 40 −0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
99
8 IQ-DC 500 + 40 −0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
99

4-22.
Appendix A Performance Test Results Sheet
Test site Report No.
Date
Test supervisor

Equipment name
MS8901A Digital Broadcast Signal Analyzer Ambient temperature °C
MX890120B ISDB-T Signal Analysis Software Relative humidity %
Serial No. Atmospheric pressure hPa

Note:

Frequency measurement (modulation wave)

Lower limit of Lower Measured Upper Upper limit Guard

Frequency Level Judge-
No. Average Preamplifier specification effective value effective of specifi- band
(MHz) (dBm) ment
(Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) cation (Hz) (Hz)

1 5 Off 32 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01

2 5 Off 32 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
3 5 Off 500 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
4 5 Off 500 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
5 5 Off 1000 +10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 014 0.01
6 5 Off 1000 –26 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
7 5 On 32 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
8 5 On 32 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
9 5 On 500 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
10 5 On 500 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
11 5 On 1000 –10 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
12 5 On 1000 –46 –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
13 40 Off 32 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
14 40 Off 32 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
15 40 Off 500 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
16 40 Off 500 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
17 40 Off 1000 +10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
18 40 Off 1000 –26 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
19 40 On 32 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
20 40 On 32 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
21 40 On 500 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
22 40 On 500 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
23 40 On 1000 –10 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
24 40 On 1000 –46 –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01

A-1
Appendix A Performance Test Results Sheet

Frequency measurement (modulation wave), Mode: Mode1, Modulation system: DQPSK

Meas-
Lower limit of Lower ef- Upper Upper limit Guard
Frequency Level ured Judge
No. Average Preamplifier specification fective effective of specifi- band
(MHz) (dBm) value ment
(Hz) limit (Hz) limit (Hz) cation (Hz) (Hz)
(Hz)

1 5 Off 32 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1

2 5 Off 32 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
3 5 Off 500 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
4 5 Off 500 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
5 5 Off 1000 +10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
6 5 Off 1000 –26 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
7 5 On 32 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
8 5 On 32 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
9 5 On 500 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
10 5 On 500 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
11 5 On 1000 –10 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
12 5 On 1000 –46 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1

A-2
Appendix A Performance Test Results Sheet

Frequency lock range, Mode: Mode3, Guard Interval: 1/8 for number 1 to 4
Mode: Mode1, Guard Interval: 1/4 for number 5 and 6

Lower
Aver- Lower Upper Upper limit of Guard
limit of Measured
No. Frequency age effective effective specification band Judgment
specifica- value (Hz)
count limit (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
tion (Hz)

1 32 MHz + 99 kHz 5 –0.1.5 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01

2 32 MHz + 99 kHz 40 –0.1.0 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
3 32 MHz – 99 kHz 5 –0.1.5 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
4 32 MHz – 99 kHz 40 –0.1.0 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
5 32 MHz + 99 kHz 5 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1
6 32 MHz – 99 kHz 5 –1.6 –1.5 1.5 1.6 0.1

Residual C/N

Upper limit of Guard

Offset frequency Measured value Upper effective
No. specification band Judgment
(kHz) (dBc/Hz) limit (dBc/Hz)
(dBc/Hz) (dB)
1 1 –95.1 –95 0.1
2 10 –108.1 –108 0.1
3 100 –118.1 –118 0.1

Frequency measurement (CW)

Lower
Upper
limit of Lower ef- Measured Upper Guard
Frequency limit of
No. specifi- fective limit value effective band Judgment
(MHz) specifica-
cation (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) (Hz)
tion (Hz)
(Hz)

1 32 －0.2 －0.1 ＋0.1 ＋0.2 0.1

2 500 －0.2 －0.1 ＋0.1 ＋0.2 0.1
3 1000 －0.2 －0.1 ＋0.1 ＋0.2 0.1

Frequency measurement (modulation wave) with MS8901A-18 installed, Mode: Mode3, Modulation system:
64QAM

Lower Upper
Im- limit of Lower Measured Upper limit of Guard
Judge-
No. Average count Terminal pedan specifi- effective value effective specifi- band
ment
ce cation limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) cation (Hz)
(Hz) (Hz)

1 5 Low IF-DC 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 015 0.14 0.01

2 5 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 0.15 0.14 0.01
3 40 Low IF-DC 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01
4 40 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.10 0.09 0.01

A-3
Appendix A Performance Test Results Sheet

Frequency lock range with MS8901A-18 installed, Average count: 5 for number 1, 2, 5 and 6, Average count:
40 for number 3, 4, 7 and 8

Upper
Lower
Im- Lower ef- Measured Upper limit of Guard
Frequency limit of Judge-
No. Terminal pedanc fective value effective specifi- band
specifica- ment
e limit (Hz) (Hz) limit (Hz) cation (Hz)
tion (Hz)
(Hz)

500 Low
1 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
– 99 IF-DC
500 Low
2 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
+ 99 IF-DC
500 Low
3 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
– 99 IF-DC
500 Low
4 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
+ 99 IF-DC
500
5 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
– 99
500
6 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.15 –0.14 0.14 0.15 0.01
+ 99
500
7 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
– 99
500
8 IQ-DC 50 Ω –0.10 –0.09 0.09 0.10 0.01
+ 99

A-4.
Index
Numeric and symbol
0B
G
General 2.2.3
# 2.1.1
GPIB 3.1.1
* 2.1.1
GPIB sample program 3.3
® 2.1.1
Guard interval 2.2.8, 2.8.9, 2.11.9

A
AC1 2.3.1 I
IF Band 2.2.3
AC2 2.3.1
Impedance 2.11.3
Adjust Range 2.2.6, 2.3.1, 2.8.7
Initialization 2.2.12
Ampl Vertical Scale 2.3.3
Integral Start 2.4.1
Auto. Det. Cancel 2.10.4
Integral Stop 2.4.1
Auto. Det. from Seg 2.10.3
Integral 2.4.1
Automatic range adjustment
Interim-1 2.2.3
2.2.6, 2.3.1, 2.8.7
Interim-2 2.2.3
Average power 2.5.1

C L
Last Result 2.5.5, 2.5.6
C/N 2.4
Layer_A 2.3.1
Calibration 2.1.3, 2.3.3
Layer_B 2.3.1
Cancel key 2.1.1
Layer_C 2.3.1
Channel 2.2.3, 2.8.4, 2.11.4
Level Over 2.2.6
Channel number 2.5.1
Level Under 2.2.6, 2.8.7, 2.11.7
Constellation 2.3.2
Level 2.2.6, 2.8.7, 2.11.7
Continuous 2.2.11
Low IF/IQ Unbalanced Input
Continuous mode 2.2.11
1.2.1, 2.11
Conventional 2.3.1
Correction 2.3.3
Cursor 2.1.1 M
Marker 2.5.3
Marker Trace 2.3.4, 2.5.6
E
Mask Transmission 2.5.1
Equalizer 2.3.1
MER 2.3.1
ETHERNET 3.1.3
Measurement mode 2.2.11
ETHERNET sample program
Mode 2.2.7, 2.8.8, 2.11.8
3.4
Modulation Analysis 2.3
Equipment standard 2.5.1
More key 2.1.1

F
Filter Data 2.5.5 N
No Trace 2.3.1
Filter Transmission 2.5.4
Numeric keypad 2.1.1
Fixed pattern color layout 2.14.1
Number of Channel 2.5.1
Freq Response 2.3.3
Frequency 2.2.3, 2.8.4, 2.11.4
Frequency counter 2.6

Index-1
Index

O Soft key 2.1.1

Occupied frequency bandwidth Specifications 1.4
2.5.1 Spectrum 2.2.5, 2.8.6, 2.11.6
Offset Frequency 2.2.4, 2.8.5, 2.11.5 Spectrum Mask 2.5
Option for upgrading the modulation frequency Station power 2.5.1
measurement accuracy Step key 2.1.1
1.2.2, 1.4 Storage Mode 2.7
Over Range 2.2.6 Sub-carrier MER 2.3.4
System 2.2.1, 2.8.2, 2.11.2
P
Peak Search 2.3.4 T
Performance test 4.3 Terminal 2.2.2, 2.8.3, 2.11.3
Preamplifier 2.2.10, 2.8.11, 2.11.11 Threshold Offset 2.3.4
Preset 2.2.12 TMCC 2.2.9, 2.3.1, 2.8.10,
2.11.10
R TMCC automatic detection 2.10.1
Recall 2.13.2 TMCC information 2.10.2
Recalling spectrum mask line
2.5.2 U
Receive of Segment 2.3.1 UHF 2.2.3
Recv. Seg 2.3.5 UHF (Brazil) 2.2.3
Ref Setting 2.2.6, 2.8.7 Under Range 2.2.6
Reference level setting 2.2.6 Uncorrection Result 2.5.5
RF/IF switch function 2.8 User defined color layout 2.14.2
Rotary Encoder 2.1.1
RS232C 3.1.2 W
Worst envelope line 2.3.4
S
Save Data to Mem Card 2.12.2
Save 2.13.1
Saving measurement data 2.12
Saving numerical value data
2.12.2
Saving screen 2.12.1
Screen color layout 2.14
Section 2.3.2
Segmentation Offset 2.3.1, 2.36
Set key 2.1.1
Signal Analysis 2.3
Signal automatic detection 2.10.1
Signal parameter automatic detection function
2.10
Single 2.2.11
Single mode 2.2.11

Index-2.

Mobile Offensive Security Pocket Guide: A Quick Reference Guide For Android And iOS
From Everand
Mobile Offensive Security Pocket Guide: A Quick Reference Guide For Android And iOS
James Stevenson
1/5 (1)
NI-XNET Hardware and Software Manual
No ratings yet
NI-XNET Hardware and Software Manual
1,247 pages
Operators Guide
50% (2)
Operators Guide
376 pages
Ni Sbrio-9651: System On Module
No ratings yet
Ni Sbrio-9651: System On Module
76 pages
Anr Ms2721b Manual
No ratings yet
Anr Ms2721b Manual
58 pages
ANRITSU MT8802A Operation PDF
No ratings yet
ANRITSU MT8802A Operation PDF
462 pages
VNA Master: MS2024A/MS2026A and MS2034A/MS2036A
No ratings yet
VNA Master: MS2024A/MS2026A and MS2034A/MS2036A
309 pages
Anritsu 37xxxd Operation
No ratings yet
Anritsu 37xxxd Operation
630 pages
Spectrum Master: MS2722C, MS2723C, MS2724C, MS2725C and MS2726C
No ratings yet
Spectrum Master: MS2722C, MS2723C, MS2724C, MS2725C and MS2726C
113 pages
00266L PDF
No ratings yet
00266L PDF
208 pages
BlueSuite Pro Manual Rev. C
No ratings yet
BlueSuite Pro Manual Rev. C
50 pages
Anritsu Mt8802a Operation
No ratings yet
Anritsu Mt8802a Operation
462 pages
Anritsu Ethernet Tester PDF
No ratings yet
Anritsu Ethernet Tester PDF
190 pages
Bluetooth Test Set: Operation Manual
No ratings yet
Bluetooth Test Set: Operation Manual
231 pages
Anritsu MS2723B Spectrum Master Users Guide
No ratings yet
Anritsu MS2723B Spectrum Master Users Guide
120 pages
MT9083 Series: ACCESS Master
No ratings yet
MT9083 Series: ACCESS Master
34 pages
Anritsu Ms2712e User Guide
No ratings yet
Anritsu Ms2712e User Guide
102 pages
SA-02A4_SA-02M_Software_Instruction_Manual
No ratings yet
SA-02A4_SA-02M_Software_Instruction_Manual
130 pages
Symbol Editor: User's Manual
No ratings yet
Symbol Editor: User's Manual
24 pages
MA24104A Inline High Power Sensor: User Guide
No ratings yet
MA24104A Inline High Power Sensor: User Guide
56 pages
Anritsu MG3642A
No ratings yet
Anritsu MG3642A
212 pages
Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power Plants
From Everand
Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power Plants
IAEA
No ratings yet
Digital Television Signal Analyzer Measurement Guide
No ratings yet
Digital Television Signal Analyzer Measurement Guide
236 pages
Anritsu Manual
No ratings yet
Anritsu Manual
632 pages
ML248xA / ML249xA Wideband Peak Power Meter Remote Programming Manual
No ratings yet
ML248xA / ML249xA Wideband Peak Power Meter Remote Programming Manual
286 pages
10410-00208d
No ratings yet
10410-00208d
44 pages
Site Master
No ratings yet
Site Master
92 pages
Anritsu S331L User Guide
No ratings yet
Anritsu S331L User Guide
156 pages
Anritsu S362E
No ratings yet
Anritsu S362E
112 pages
InduSoft Application Design and SCADA Deployment Recommendations for Industrial Control System Security
From Everand
InduSoft Application Design and SCADA Deployment Recommendations for Industrial Control System Security
Richard Clark
No ratings yet
00285H PDF
No ratings yet
00285H PDF
286 pages
DAQ GUIDE 370784k
No ratings yet
DAQ GUIDE 370784k
277 pages
13000-00238 - ML248xB & ML249xA Operation Manual - Rev-J
No ratings yet
13000-00238 - ML248xB & ML249xA Operation Manual - Rev-J
296 pages
FMS5-User-Manual-6002773Q-web
No ratings yet
FMS5-User-Manual-6002773Q-web
146 pages
MS2651B Vol.2 - Detailed Operating Instructions
No ratings yet
MS2651B Vol.2 - Detailed Operating Instructions
320 pages
LogDatCH User Guide 6006020B
No ratings yet
LogDatCH User Guide 6006020B
15 pages
Anritsu MS462XX VECTOR NETWORK MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 10410-00205
No ratings yet
Anritsu MS462XX VECTOR NETWORK MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 10410-00205
205 pages
ANRITSU S332E
No ratings yet
ANRITSU S332E
82 pages
Arduino and Scilab based Projects
From Everand
Arduino and Scilab based Projects
Rajesh Singh
No ratings yet
10580-00327A - Site Master S325D - Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
10580-00327A - Site Master S325D - Quick Start Guide
16 pages
Licensing Agreement - Disclaimer
No ratings yet
Licensing Agreement - Disclaimer
1 page
GPIB Analyzer User Manual
No ratings yet
GPIB Analyzer User Manual
69 pages
Anritsu 2035B Vna Quick Start Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Anritsu 2035B Vna Quick Start Guide PDF
8 pages
LogDat2 Installation Guide PDF
No ratings yet
LogDat2 Installation Guide PDF
23 pages
Can and Lin
100% (1)
Can and Lin
447 pages
NI VirtualBench Manual
No ratings yet
NI VirtualBench Manual
71 pages
Acura-Honda Automotive SRS Airbag Repair Manual
From Everand
Acura-Honda Automotive SRS Airbag Repair Manual
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
Instrument Anritsu Specanalyzer Measure Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Instrument Anritsu Specanalyzer Measure Guide PDF
210 pages
PXI 1033 User Manual
No ratings yet
PXI 1033 User Manual
42 pages
Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide
No ratings yet
Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide
266 pages
Vectorstar Pulse Modulator Test Set: Installation Guide
No ratings yet
Vectorstar Pulse Modulator Test Set: Installation Guide
22 pages
S33X USER MANUALr
No ratings yet
S33X USER MANUALr
112 pages
Confidence in Your CGM: Mastering the Freestyle Libre 3
From Everand
Confidence in Your CGM: Mastering the Freestyle Libre 3
Samuel Sinclair
No ratings yet
SE Getting Started PDF
No ratings yet
SE Getting Started PDF
214 pages
TSI_Electrostatic_classifier_model_3082_Scanning_Mobility_Particle_Sizer_Spectrometer_Model_3938 (1)
No ratings yet
TSI_Electrostatic_classifier_model_3082_Scanning_Mobility_Particle_Sizer_Spectrometer_Model_3938 (1)
225 pages
NI 5112 User Manual
No ratings yet
NI 5112 User Manual
54 pages
Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Manual PDF
79 pages
Mg3692c Service Manual
No ratings yet
Mg3692c Service Manual
568 pages
Operating Manual: 900 MHZ Spread Spectrum Oem Transceiver
No ratings yet
Operating Manual: 900 MHZ Spread Spectrum Oem Transceiver
15 pages
Caution
No ratings yet
Caution
470 pages
ERX-6v2_web
No ratings yet
ERX-6v2_web
4 pages
R&S ESW User Manual en 01
No ratings yet
R&S ESW User Manual en 01
828 pages
TC1304V
No ratings yet
TC1304V
2 pages
E4406A VSA Series
No ratings yet
E4406A VSA Series
266 pages
Upc1688 C1C
No ratings yet
Upc1688 C1C
4 pages
N9020A Service Manual
No ratings yet
N9020A Service Manual
632 pages
Anritsu Ms2602a Service
No ratings yet
Anritsu Ms2602a Service
128 pages
S312D Mainetance
No ratings yet
S312D Mainetance
62 pages
2615A-2620A-2625-2630 (BK Precision)
No ratings yet
2615A-2620A-2625-2630 (BK Precision)
23 pages
Dell RAC Serial/Telnet Console: Remotely Managing UNIX and Linux Servers Using The
No ratings yet
Dell RAC Serial/Telnet Console: Remotely Managing UNIX and Linux Servers Using The
4 pages
G10 - Bias Detectives
No ratings yet
G10 - Bias Detectives
1 page
Group and Group Dynamics: Unit-2
No ratings yet
Group and Group Dynamics: Unit-2
20 pages
Lec 1
No ratings yet
Lec 1
57 pages
CompNtwk Frame Relay/EIGRP PT Practice SBA Answers
No ratings yet
CompNtwk Frame Relay/EIGRP PT Practice SBA Answers
6 pages
Te II Assignment
No ratings yet
Te II Assignment
4 pages
Bringing The Factory Back In: The Crumbling of Consent and The Molding of Collective Capacity at Work
No ratings yet
Bringing The Factory Back In: The Crumbling of Consent and The Molding of Collective Capacity at Work
23 pages
Figures of Speech
No ratings yet
Figures of Speech
36 pages
Heterocyclic Chemistry Exercises To Practice.
No ratings yet
Heterocyclic Chemistry Exercises To Practice.
58 pages
Chapter 11 - Cardiovascular System
No ratings yet
Chapter 11 - Cardiovascular System
10 pages
Information Brochure: B.Sc. Nursing Course (4 Years) Common Nursing Entrance Test (CNET) Academic Session 2023-24
No ratings yet
Information Brochure: B.Sc. Nursing Course (4 Years) Common Nursing Entrance Test (CNET) Academic Session 2023-24
17 pages
AP PW D Code
100% (1)
AP PW D Code
327 pages
Introduction of Protozoa
100% (2)
Introduction of Protozoa
31 pages
An Inquiry To The Influence of Choosing
No ratings yet
An Inquiry To The Influence of Choosing
13 pages
ESD Objective Questions
No ratings yet
ESD Objective Questions
14 pages
Techniques and Imaging of Soft Tissues: A. Mark Davies and Andrew J. Grainger
No ratings yet
Techniques and Imaging of Soft Tissues: A. Mark Davies and Andrew J. Grainger
23 pages
131 - Physics 2
No ratings yet
131 - Physics 2
4 pages
LC26 32ga5u
No ratings yet
LC26 32ga5u
166 pages
Euro Tower Presentation
No ratings yet
Euro Tower Presentation
38 pages
The Ultimate Handbook Forex Trading Basi
No ratings yet
The Ultimate Handbook Forex Trading Basi
59 pages
Daftar Peralatan
No ratings yet
Daftar Peralatan
2 pages
Investigating The Impact of Game Features and Content On Champion Usage in League of Legends
No ratings yet
Investigating The Impact of Game Features and Content On Champion Usage in League of Legends
9 pages
Axia College Material: Appendix C
No ratings yet
Axia College Material: Appendix C
4 pages
History of Libraries
No ratings yet
History of Libraries
17 pages
Sap SD
75% (4)
Sap SD
14 pages
Infa Practice Test 1
No ratings yet
Infa Practice Test 1
47 pages
Chapter 10 Food Production
No ratings yet
Chapter 10 Food Production
5 pages
SLK Fabm1 Week 6
No ratings yet
SLK Fabm1 Week 6
8 pages
Introduction to Equipment Used in Quantitative Food Production
No ratings yet
Introduction to Equipment Used in Quantitative Food Production
3 pages
Energy Conservation (Singh)
No ratings yet
Energy Conservation (Singh)
6 pages